gmc canyon owner manual - 2011 black plate (1,1) 2011 gmc canyon owner manual … · 2020-06-12 ·...

Black plate (1,1)GMC Canyon Owner Manual - 2011

2011 GMC Canyon Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-28Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-37Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-40Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-48Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-70


2011 GMC Canyon Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-10

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, and CANYONare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for GMCwherever it appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 delangue françaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20819997 A First Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-7Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Sensing System for PassengerAirbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-11Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-17Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-17Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-17Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Manual Transmission shown, Automatic Transmission similar


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑3.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑2.

C. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑8.

D. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑3.

E. Passenger Side Airbag. SeeAirbag System on page 3‑28.

F. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Fog Lamps on page 6‑4(If Equipped).

Exterior Cargo Lamps onpage 6‑5.

G. Parking Brake on page 9‑47.

H. Data Link Connector (DLC).See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑14.

I. Horn on page 5‑2.

J. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑50.

Four-Wheel Drive onpage 10‑31.

K. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7.

L. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped).See Ashtrays on page 5‑6 andCigarette Lighter on page 5‑6.

M. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.

N. Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

O. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑12.

P. Glove Box on page 4‑1.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.


1-4 In Brief

Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used tolock and unlock the doors from upto 9 m (30 ft) away from the vehicle.

Press UNLOCK to unlock the doorsand press LOCK to lock them.

PressL to sound the horn andto flash the exterior lamps for30 seconds.

Lock and unlock feedback canbe personalized. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Door Locks

Manual Door Locks

Lock or unlock the door from theoutside with the key in the driveror front passenger door or pressthe LOCK or UNLOCK buttonon the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

Lock the door from the inside bymoving the manual lever on thedoor forward or rearward.

Power Door Locks

Press L or U on the switch on thearmrest to lock or unlock the doors.

For more information see:. Door Locks on page 2‑4.. Power Door Locks on page 2‑5.


In Brief 1-5

Tailgate

Open the tailgate by pulling up onthe outside handle while pulling thetailgate down.

On vehicles with a locking tailgate,use the ignition key to unlock it.

For more information see Tailgateon page 2‑7.

Windows

Manual Windows

Use the window crank to open andclose each window.

Power Windows

Press or pull up on the front of theswitch to open or close the window.

For more information see:. Manual Windows on page 2‑15.. Power Windows on page 2‑16.


1-6 In Brief

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the bar under the front of theseat cushion to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to make sure it is locked inplace.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3for more information.

Power Seats

If available, the power seat controlsare on the outboard sides of thefront seats.

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding thehorizontal control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thehorizontal control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the entire horizontalcontrol up or down.

. Raise or recline the seatback bymoving the vertical control.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 and Reclining Seatbackson page 3‑5 for more information.


In Brief 1-7

Power Lumbar

If available, press and hold thefront or rear of the control on theoutboard side of the seat toincrease or decrease lumbarsupport. Release the control whenthe level of support is reached.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑4 for more information.

Heated Seats

If available, the switches are on theoutboard sides of the front seats. Tooperate, the ignition must be on.. Press the top of the switch for

the high setting.. Press the bottom of the switch

for the low setting.. Put the switch in the center

position to turn this feature off.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑8 for more information.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and thehead restraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.


1-8 In Brief

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑12.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑15.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑21.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑50.

Sensing System forPassenger AirbagThe passenger sensing system,if equipped, will turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. The driverairbags are not affected by this.

If the vehicle has one of thepassenger airbag status indicatorspictured in the following illustrations,then the vehicle has a passengersensing system.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicleis started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑34 for important information.


In Brief 1-9

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Vehicles with power outside mirrorshave controls located on thedriver door.

1. Move the selector switch to theL (left) or R (right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrowslocated on the control pad tomove the mirror to the desireddirection.

3. Return the selector switch to thecenter position once the mirrorsare adjusted.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑13.

Vehicles with manual outsidemirrors can be adjusted by pressingthe mirror up and down and left andright so that you can see a clearview behind you.

Manually fold the mirrors inwardto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn to its original position.

See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑12.

Interior Mirror

On vehicles with a manual insiderearview mirror, the mirror can beadjusted by holding it in the centerto move it for a clear view behindyou. To avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you, push thetab forward for daytime use andpull it for nighttime use.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑13.

The automatic dimming insiderearview mirror will automaticallyreduce the glare of lights frombehind the vehicle.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑14.


1-10 In Brief

Steering WheelAdjustment

The steering wheel adjustment leveris located on the left side of thesteering wheel.

To adjust:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever toward you.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened.

To manually turn on the domelamps, turn the thumbwheel, locatednext to the exterior lamps control, allthe way up. The cargo lamps maycome on, if the vehicle is equippedwith Bluetooth. In this position, thelamps remain on whether a door isopened or closed.

Reading Lamps

Press the lens on the lamps to turneach reading lamp on or off.

These lamps will not come on withthe dome lamps.. See “Dome Lamp Override” in

Dome Lamps on page 6‑6.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑5.. Exit Lighting on page 6‑6.


In Brief 1-11

Exterior Lighting

O : Turns off all exterior lampsincluding the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

AUTO: Automatic operation of theheadlamps and other exterior lampsat normal brightness.

;: Manual operation of the parkinglamps and other exterior lamps.

2: Manual operation of theheadlamps and other exteriorlamps.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2.. Automatic Headlamp System on

page 6‑3.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.. Exterior Cargo Lamps on

page 6‑5.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

8: Single wipe, move the band toand then release it. Several wipes,hold the band on longer.

N: For a delayed wiping cycle.Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.


1-12 In Brief

6: Slow wipes, turn the bandto the first solid position past thedelay settings.

1: Fast wipes, turn the band tothe second solid position past thedelay settings.

9: Turns the wipers off.

Windshield Washer: Push thepaddle on top of the multifunctionlever to spray washer fluid on thewindshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑2.

Climate Controls

A. Temperature Control

B. Fan Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. Air Recirculation

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1.


In Brief 1-13

Four-Wheel DriveFour-wheel drive sends enginepower to all four wheels for extratraction.

The transfer case buttons arelocated to the right of the steeringwheel on the instrument panel.

Use these buttons to shift into andout of four-wheel drive.

2 m (Two-Wheel High): Use fordriving in most street and highwaysituations.

{ WARNING

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer casein N (Neutral). See Parking Brakeon page 9‑47.

N (Neutral): Use the N (Neutral)position only when towing thevehicle. See Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10‑94.

4 m (Four-Wheel High): Use whenextra traction is needed in mostoff-road situations.

4 n (Four-Wheel Low): Use thisposition to deliver extra torque toall four wheels. Used for extremeoff‐road conditions. See Four-WheelDrive on page 9‑42.


1-14 In Brief

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)

PWR: Press to turn the system onand off.

q VOL r : Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2(if equipped). The selectiondisplays.

q TUNE r : Turn to select radiostations.

q SEEK r : Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeIntroduction on page 7‑1.

Setting Preset Stations

Radio stations are stored aspresets.

For vehicles with an XM radio, amaximum of 30 stations can bestored as presets using thesix numbered pushbuttons.

If the radio does not have XM, up to18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, andsix AM), can be programmed on thesix numbered buttons.

See “Setting Preset Stations” underOperation on page 7‑3.


In Brief 1-15

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theradio with CD (MP3/WMA):

Press and hold the HR button untilthe correct hour displays. Press andhold the MIN button until the correctminute displays. The time can beset with the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with anFM station broadcasting Radio DataSystem (RDS) information, pressand hold the HR and MIN buttonsat the same time until RDS TIMEdisplays. To accept this time, pressand hold the HR and MIN buttons,at the same time, for another2 seconds. If the time is notavailable from the station,NO UPDAT (update) displays.

RDS time is broadcast once aminute. After tuning to an RDSbroadcast station, it could take afew minutes for the time to update.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for your specific audiosystem, see Clock on page 5‑4.

Satellite RadioXM is a satellite radio service thatis based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM satellite radio has awide variety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theXM service.

For more information, refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

See “XM Satellite Radio Service”under Satellite Radio on page 7‑11.

Cruise Control

The cruise controls are located atthe end of the multifunction lever.

9: Turns the system off.

R : Turns the system on.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use tomake the vehicle accelerate orresume a previously set speed.

rT (Set): Press the button atthe end of the lever to set thespeed.

For more information, see CruiseControl on page 9‑52.


1-16 In Brief

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC is located on theinstrument panel cluster. It displaysthe status of many vehicle systemsand enables some features to bepersonalized.

Use the trip reset stem located onthe instrument panel cluster to scrollthrough the available functions.For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21.

Vehicle Personalization

Some vehicle features can bepersonalized through the DIC.These features include:. Language: English, Spanish,

or French. Automatic Door Locks. RKE Feedback

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle may have an accessorypower outlet located below theclimate control system and on therear of the center console.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system turns onautomatically every time the vehicleis started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release d on the instrument

panel. d illuminates and theappropriate DIC message isdisplayed. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑27.

. Press and release the buttonagain to turn on traction control.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑48.


In Brief 1-17

StabiliTrak® SystemThe Electronic Stability Controlsystem assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. The system turnson automatically every time thevehicle is started.. To turn off both traction

control and ElectronicStability Control, press andhold d until d illuminates andthe appropriate DIC messageis displayed. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑27.

. Press and release the buttonagain to turn on both systems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑50.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑22. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑59.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter.


1-18 In Brief

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press and release the stemin the lower center of theinstrument cluster until the OILLIFE message is displayed.

3. Once the alternating OIL LIFEand RESET messages appear,press and hold the stem untilseveral beeps sound. Thisconfirms that the oil life systemhas been reset.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑14.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-GMC-8782(1‐800‐462-8782)

TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0801

As the owner of a new GMC, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

For more information see RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10.


In Brief 1-19

Roadside Assistance and OnStar(U.S. and Canada)

If you have a current OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center(U.S. and Canada)

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.gmcownercenter.com (U.S.)or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar®

For vehicles with an active OnStarsubscription, OnStar uses severalinnovative technologies and liveAdvisors to provide a wide rangeof safety, security, navigation,diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built‐in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStarAdvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to see ifyou need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : Push this blue button toconnect to a specially trainedOnStar Advisor to verify youraccount information and to answerquestions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar EmergencyAdvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for Hands‐FreeCalling and Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation.

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation, and Hands‐Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are available onall vehicles. For more information,see the OnStar Owner's Guide;visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada); contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) orTTY 1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushQ tospeak with an OnStar Advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.


1-20 In Brief

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar GloveBox Kit.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.

OnStar service can’t work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar'sservice. Service involving locationinformation about your vehiclecan’t work unless GPS signalsare available, unobstructed,and compatible with the OnStar

hardware. The vehicle has to havea working electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.OnStar service may not work if theOnStar equipment isn’t properlyinstalled or you haven’t maintainedit and your vehicle is in goodworking order and in compliancewith all government regulations.If you try to add, connect, or modifyany equipment or software in yourvehicle, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems OnStar can’tcontrol may prevent service to you,such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather, electrical system designand architecture of your vehicle,damage to important parts of yourvehicle in a crash, or wireless phonenetwork congestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radioif the OnStar Advisor cannot beheard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system maynot be functioning properly. PushtheQ button and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear(no light appears), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.Push theQ button to confirm thatthe OnStar equipment is active.


Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-5Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety Locks (Crew Cab) . . . . . 2-6

DoorsRear Doors(Extended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-9Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Immobilizer Operation(PASS-Key III+Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Immobilizer Operation(Passlock U.S. Only) . . . . . . . 2-12

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-13Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17


2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignition,all door locks, and the tailgate.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin your vehicle.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If you are locked out of your vehicle,call the Roadside AssistanceCenter. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑8 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.



. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationVehicles with Remote KeylessEntry (RKE), transmitter functionswork up to 9 m (30 ft) away from thevehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑2.

UNLOCK: Press to unlock thedriver door and turn on the interiorlamps. The parking lamps may flashand the horn may sound.

Press UNLOCK again withinthree seconds and all of the doorsunlock.

LOCK: Press to lock all the doors.The parking lamps may flash andthe horn may sound.

If a door is open or ajar whenLOCK is pressed, the horn soundsseveral times to let you know thedoors did not lock and the contenttheft‐deterrent system is not armed.Pressing LOCK again while the hornis sounding or within three secondsafter the horn stops sounding,the doors lock but the contenttheft‐deterrent system does not armuntil the opened door is closed.

Different feedback modes can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See“Remote Keyless Entry Feedback”under Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 5‑21.

L (Panic): Press to make thehorn sound and the headlamps andtaillamps flash for up to 30 seconds.To turn them off wait for 30 seconds,or press L again, or start thevehicle.



Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitteris programmed to the vehicle, allremaining transmitters must alsobe programmed. Any lost or stolentransmitters no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up tofour transmitters programmed to it.

Battery Replacement

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted in theslot between the covers of thetransmitter housing.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery. Replacewith a CR2032 or equivalentbattery.

4. Put the transmitter backtogether.

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle ina crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock the door from theoutside, use the key in the driver orfront passenger door or press theLOCK or UNLOCK button on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

To lock a door from the inside,move the manual lever on the doorforward. To unlock a door from theinside, move the lever on the doorrearward.

You will see a colored area on thelever when the door is unlocked.

Power Door Locks

Driver Switch Shown

On vehicles with power door locks,the switches are located on thedriver and the front passengerarmrests.

Press L to lock all the doors at once.To unlock all the doors, press U.

On crew cab models, use themanual door lock lever on each reardoor to lock or unlock the doorsfrom the rear seating areas.

Automatic Door LocksIf the vehicle has power doorlocks and the remote keylessentry system, it has an automaticlock/unlock feature.

If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, it is programmedfrom the factory to lock all doorsautomatically when the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park). All the doorswill unlock when the shift lever ismoved back into P (Park).

If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, it is programmed fromthe factory to lock all the doorswhen the vehicle speed is greaterthan 24 km/h (15 mph). The doorswill unlock when the key is removedfrom the ignition.

To change the automatic doorlock and unlock settings, see“Automatic Door Locks” underDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21.



Lockout ProtectionIf the vehicle has power door locks,this feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a dooris open.

If the power door lock switch ispressed when a door is open andthe key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the driverdoor will unlock.

Safety Locks (Crew Cab)If the vehicle is a crew cab model, itmay have rear door security locks.With this feature, the rear doors arelocked so they cannot be openedfrom the inside.

The rear door security lock islocated on the inside edge of eachrear door below the security locklabel.

To engage the security locks:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. Using the ignition key, turn thelock to the horizontal position.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat these steps on the otherrear door.

To open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, unlock the doorand open the door from the outside.

To disengage the security locks:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. Using the ignition key, turn thelock to the vertical position.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat these steps on the otherrear door.



Doors

Rear Doors(Extended Cab)To open a rear door, open the frontdoor. Then, use the handle locatedon the front edge of the rear doorpanel to open it. The rear doorsmust be closed before closing thefront door.

Tailgate

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to rideon the tailgate, even when thevehicle is operated at low speeds.People riding on the tailgatecan easily lose their balanceand fall in response to vehiclemaneuvers. Falling from a movingvehicle may result in seriousinjuries or death. Do not allowpeople to ride on the tailgate.Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a safetybelt properly.

Open the tailgate by pulling up onthe outside handle while pulling thetailgate down.

When the tailgate is shut, be sure itis latched securely.

On vehicles with a locking tailgate,use the ignition key. Turn the keycounterclockwise to lock thetailgate. Turn the key clockwise tounlock the tailgate.



Tailgate Removal

To remove the tailgate:

1. With the tailgate fully open, liftup slightly on the entire tailgateassembly.

2. Remove the retaining cablesfrom both sides of the tailgate bypulling the clips away from thebolt heads while pushing thecable bracket forward.

When the larger part of the holeon the bracket is over the bolt,slide the bracket off of the bolt.

3. With the tailgate partially down,lift up on the passenger side andpull the tailgate toward you, thenmove the tailgate to the right torelease the driver side. You canthen remove the entire tailgateassembly.

Reverse the procedure to reinstallthe tailgate. Make sure it is secure.

To partially lower the tailgate:

1. With the tailgate fully open, liftup slightly on the entire tailgateassembly.

Tailgate Partially Down

2. Remove the retaining cablefrom the passenger side of thetailgate by pulling the clip awayfrom the bolt head while pushingthe cable bracket forward.



When the larger part of the holeon the bracket is over the bolt,slide the bracket off the bolt.

3. Slide the lower end fitting ontothe top bolt. The tailgate will nowstay in the partially openedposition.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for thedriver side.

If you would like to close thetailgate, the bracket cannot be in thepartially opened position. Use thetop position on the bracket toanchor it on the bottom bolt.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm System

If your vehicle has the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) system, thevehicle has a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

To activate the contenttheft-deterrent system:

1. Close all the doors.

2. Lock the doors with the RKEtransmitter. The security light,located on the instrument panelcluster, will flash.

If the LOCK button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, but a door isopen, the horn will chirp six times.Press the LOCK button again, withinthree seconds, and the doors willlock. Close the open door and thesystem will be activated.

If a locked door is not opened usingthe RKE transmitter, or by OnStar®,the pre-alarm will go off. If theengine is not started or UNLOCKnot pressed within 10 seconds, thefront turn signal lamps will flash fortwo minutes, and the horn will soundfor two minutes, then will turn off tosave the battery power.

Remember, the theft-deterrentsystem will not activate if you lockthe doors with a key, the manualdoor lock, or power door lockswitch. The system can only beactivated using the RKE transmitter,or by OnStar®. See the OnStarOwner's Guide for additionalinformation. You should alsoremember that you can start yourvehicle with the correct ignition keyif the alarm has been set off.



Here is how to avoid setting off thealarm by accident:. If you do not want to activate

the theft-deterrent system, thevehicle should be locked withthe door key after the doors areclosed.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter. Unlocking adoor any other way will set offthe alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident,you can turn off the alarm bypressing UNLOCK on the RKEtransmitter. The alarm will not stopif you try to unlock a door anyother way.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, activatethe system by locking the doorswith the RKE transmitter.

2. Unlock the door with the manualdoor lock and open the door.This should set off the alarm.

3. To turn the alarm off, press theUNLOCK button on the RKEtransmitter or start the engine.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould but the lights flash, check tosee if the horn works. The horn fusemay be blown. To replace the fuse,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑43.

If the alarm does not sound or thefront turn signal lamps do not flash,see your dealer for service.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Immobilizer Operation(PASS-Key III+Canada Only)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turnedto ON/RUN.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

The key uses a transponder thatmatches an immobilizer control unitin the vehicle. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. If the key is everdamaged, the vehicle may not start.



When trying to start the vehicle,if the engine does not start and thesecurity light comes on, there maybe a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition off and tryagain.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. Checkthe fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑43. If theengine still does not start with theother key, the vehicle needs service.If the vehicle does start, the first keymay be faulty. See your dealer whocan service the theft-deterrentsystem and have a new key made.

It is possible for the theft-deterrentsystem decoder to learn thetransponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keyscan be programmed for the vehicle.The following procedure is forprogramming additional keys only.

Canadian Owners: If the keys arelost or damaged, only a dealer canservice the theft-deterrent system tohave new ones made. Two currentdriver's keys are required toprogram additional keys.

To program a new key:

1. Verify that the new key hasPK3+ stamped on it.

2. Insert the current driver's key inthe ignition and start the engine.If the engine does not start seeyour dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the second current driver'skey in the ignition and start theengine within ten seconds ofremoving the previous key. If theengine does not start see yourdealer for service.

5. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key. Insert the key tobe programmed and turn it toON/RUN within ten seconds ofremoving the previous key.

The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If the security light comes on andstays on while driving, the enginewill restart if you turn it off. However,the theft-deterrent system is notworking properly and must beserviced by your dealer. Thevehicle is not protected by thetheft-deterrent system at this time.

In an emergency, contact RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10.



Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Immobilizer Operation(Passlock U.S. Only)Passlock® is a passivetheft-deterrent system that enablesfuel if the vehicle is started with avalid key. If an incorrect key isused or the ignition lock cylinder istampered with, the fuel system isdisabled and the vehicle does notstart.

The security light turns offapproximately five seconds afterthe engine is started. See SecurityLight on page 5‑20.

If the engine stalls and the securitylight flashes, wait about 10 minutesuntil the light stops flashing beforetrying to restart the engine. Releasethe key from START as soon as theengine starts.

If the engine does not start afterthree tries, the vehicle needsservice.

If the engine is running and thesecurity light comes on, the enginerestarts if you turn the engine off.However, the Passlock® system isnot working properly and must beserviced by your dealer. The vehicleis not protected by Passlock® at thistime. See your dealer for service.

In an emergency, call the RoadsideAssistance Center. See RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Manual MirrorsAdjust the mirrors by pressing themirror up and down and left andright so you can see a clear viewbehind you.



Manually fold the mirrors inwardto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash. Tofold, push the mirrors toward thevehicle. Push outward, to return themirrors to their original position.

Power Mirrors

Vehicles with outside power mirrorshave controls on the driver doorarmrest.

To adjust the power mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch to theL (left) or R (right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press one of the four buttonslocated on the control pad tomove the mirror to the desireddirection.

3. Return the selector switch to thecenter position once the mirrorsare adjusted.

If the mirror begins making aratcheting sound, the mirror hasreached the end of its travel andcan go no farther in that direction.To stop the sound, reverse themirror direction using thecontrol pad.

Manually fold the mirrors inwardto prevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.To fold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Push outward, to return themirror to its original position.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust this mirror for a clear view ofthe area behind the vehicle. Holdthe mirror in the center to move itup, down, or side-to-side. To reduceheadlamp glare, push the tabforward for daytime use and pull itfor nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® havethree additional control buttonslocated at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar. See theOnStar Owner's Guide for moreinformation about the servicesOnStar provides.



Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare of lights from behind thevehicle.

The mirror may also have OnStar®

and/or a compass and outsidetemperature display.

Control buttons for the OnStarsystem are at the bottom of themirror. See the OnStar OwnersGuide for more information aboutthe services OnStar provides. SeeCompass on page 5‑3 for moreinformation about the compassdisplay. See “Temperature Display”after, for more information about theoutside temperature display.

AUTO/ ( / O (On/Off): Press

and hold AUTO/ ( for aboutthree seconds or depending on themirror, press O to turn automaticdimming on or off. The automaticdimming feature comes on and theindicator light illuminates each timethe vehicle is started.

Temperature Display

Y b / O (On/Off): Press Y b ordepending on the mirror, press O toturn the display on or off.

To adjust between Fahrenheit andCelsius:

1. Press and hold Y b / O for afew seconds. The current unit ofmeasure (C or F) flashes.

2. Press Y b / O again andrelease to change the unit ofmeasure. Wait several secondsand the compass/temperaturedisplay returns with the selectedunit of measure.

It is normal under certain conditionsfor the temperature update to bedelayed. If an incorrect temperaturedisplays for an extended period, seeyour dealer.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.



Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Manual Windows

On vehicles with manual windows,use the window crank to open andclose each window.



Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

On vehicles with power windows,the switches on the driver's doorarmrest control both windows.

The passenger's door has a windowswitch that controls that window.Press the front of the switch to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.

Express-Down Window

Windows with an express-downfeature allow the window to belowered fully without pressing andholding the switch. Press the front ofthe switch to the first position, andthe window opens a small amount.Press the switch down fully and thewindow goes all the way down.

To stop the window while it islowering, pull up the front of theswitch.



Rear Windows

Sliding Rear Window

If the vehicle has this feature,squeeze the latch in the center ofthe window and slide the glass toopen it.

Be sure the latch is engaged whenthe window is closed.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rodif, available.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Rear SeatsRear Seats (Extended Cab) . . . 3-9Rear Seats (Crew Cab) . . . . . . 3-10

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-26Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-26Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-30When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-40

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-41Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-46Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-48Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-60

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-60

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

On some crew cab models, thevehicle's front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.



To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the restraintdown. Try to move the headrestraint after the button is releasedto make sure that it is locked inplace.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Rear Seats

On some crew cab models, thevehicle's rear seats have adjustableheadrests in the outboard seatingpositions that can be adjustedthe same way as the front headrestraints.

Rear outboard headrests are notdesigned to be removed.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust the seat:

1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the bar.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure the seat islocked in place.



Power Seat Adjustment

If available, the power seat controlsare on the outboard side of theseats.

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding thehorizontal control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thehorizontal control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the entire horizontalcontrol up or down.

To adjust the seatback, see “PowerReclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

If available, the manual lumbarknob is on the outboard side of thedriver seat.

Turn the knob to increase ordecrease lumbar support.



Power Lumbar

If available, the power lumbarcontrol is on the outboard side ofthe seat.

To increase or decrease lumbarsupport, press and hold the frontor rear of the control. Release thecontrol when the seatback reachesthe desired level of lumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

If available, the manual recline leveris on the outboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.



Power Reclining Seatbacks

If available, use the vertical controlon the outboard side of the seat toadjust the seatback.. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

Seatback LatchesThe vehicle may have frontseatbacks that fold forward for easyaccess to the rear seats or thestorage area behind the seats.

To fold the seatback forward, pushthe lever on the side of the seatrearward and pull the seatbackforward.

{ WARNING


To return the seatback to the uprightposition, push the seatback all theway back until it latches.

If the seatback was reclined beforebeing folded forward, it will return tothe reclined position.



Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

If available, the switches are on theoutboard sides of the front seats. Tooperate, the ignition must be on.

This feature will heat the cushionand back of the seats.. Press the top of the switch for

the high setting.. Press the bottom of the switch

for the low setting.. Put the switch in the center

position to turn this feature off.

The heated seat will turn on at thelast setting if the ignition is turnedoff and then back on.

The passenger safety belt must befastened for the heated seat featureto work on the passenger seat.



Rear Seats

Rear Seats(Extended Cab)

On extended cab models, theremay be forward folding seats in therear area.

To fold a rear seat cushion fromthe stored position to the sittingposition, pull the front of the seatcushion down completely.

The rear seat storage compartmentsmust be closed before folding theseat down. See Rear Storage onpage 4‑2.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To store the seat:

1. Secure the safety belt buckle tothe inboard side of the seat withthe hook and loop fastener (A),so that it does not move whennot in use.

2. Push the entire seat up until it isflush with the trim panel.



Rear Seats (Crew Cab)On crew cab models, the rearseatbacks can be folded forward.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold a rear seatback forward:

1. Disconnect the rear centersafety belt latch from the minibuckle by inserting the tip of thesafety belt tongue into the sloton the buckle. Let the beltretract.

2. Pull the loop on the outboardside of the seatback forwarduntil you hear a click.

3. Fold the seatback forward.



To return a seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the seatback up and push itrearward.

{ WARNING


2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

3. Reconnect the center safety beltlatch plate to the mini buckle.Make sure the safety belt is nottwisted.

4. Push and pull on the latch plateto be sure it is secure.

When the seatback is not in use, itshould be kept in the upright, lockedposition.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, the injuries can bemuch worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or beejected from the vehicle. Youand your passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In thesame crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, andcheck that your passenger(s)are restrained properly too.

{ WARNING

People riding on the tailgate(if equipped) can easily lose theirbalance and fall even when thevehicle is operated at low speeds.Falling from a moving vehicle mayresult in serious injuries or death.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle that isnot equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyone inyour vehicle is in a seat and usinga safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑11 for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in acrash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!



Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.



The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow downas the vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.



Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be—whether you arewearing a safety belt or not. Butyour chance of being consciousduring and after an accident,so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you arebelted. And you can unbucklea safety belt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection. That is true notonly in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash— evenone that is not your fault— youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25miles) of home.And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deathsoccur at speeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding inthe vehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑42 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑44. Follow thoserules for everyone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.



First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keep yourfeet on the floor in front of you. Thelap part of the belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash, this

applies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If you slidunder it, the belt would apply forceon your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Thelap belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touchingthe thighs.




A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, thebelt would apply too much forceto the ribs, which are not asstrong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internalorgans like your liver or spleen.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across thechest.




A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could move toofar forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. Youmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt except forthe center front passenger position,if equipped, which has a lap belt.See Lap Belt on page 3‑25 for moreinformation.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If you ever pull the shoulderportion of a passenger belt outall the way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, just let the beltgo back all the way and startagain.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system,if equipped. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑34for more information.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑26.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjuster” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be sure thebelt is out of the way. If a door isslammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both the beltand the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingposition.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑15.



To move it up or down, squeeze therelease buttons (A) together andmove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout squeezing the releasebuttons to make sure it has lockedinto position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System PartsAfter a Crash on page 3‑27.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides for the rearoutside positions. If not, they areavailable through your dealer.

Rear shoulder belt comfort guidesmay provide added safety beltcomfort for older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the shoulder belt:

1. Slide the guide off of its storageclip located between the interiorbody and the seatback.



2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.



4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide back on its storage cliplocated between the interior bodyand the seatback.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Lap BeltThis section is only for the lap belt.To learn how to wear a lap-shoulderbelt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑21.

The vehicle may have a centerseating position. When you sit in thecenter front seating position, youhave a lap safety belt, which has noretractor.



To make the belt longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along the belt.

Buckle, position, and release it thesame way as the lap part of alap-shoulder belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 3‑26.

Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors,and anchorages are workingproperly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt system



from doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑11 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑27.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑12.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.

Your vehicle may also have thefollowing airbags:. A roof-rail airbag for the driver

and the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in your vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑31.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withroof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag systemis designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑42 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑44.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑12 formore information.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver's airbag is in the middleof the steering wheel.

The right front passenger's airbagis in the instrument panel on thepassenger's side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

If your vehicle has roof-railairbags for the driver, right frontpassenger, and second rowoutboard passengers, they are inthe ceiling above the side windows.



{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designedto inflate if the impact exceedsa predetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags willor should deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.



Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle has seat positionsensors which enables the sensingsystem to monitor the position ofthe driver's seat and the right frontpassenger's seat. Seat positionsensors provide information that isused to determine if the airbagsshould deploy at a reduced level orat full deployment.

In addition, your vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

Your vehicle may or may not haveroof-rail airbags. See Airbag Systemon page 3‑28. Roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes. Roof-railairbags will inflate if the crashseverity is above the system'sdesigned threshold level. Thethreshold level can vary withspecific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.Both roof-rail airbags will deploywhen either side of the vehicle isstruck.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forroof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat‐mounted side impact airbags,there are airbags modules in theside of the front seatbacks closestto the door. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows that haveoccupant seating positions.



How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stopping theoccupant more gradually. Roof-railairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motionis not toward those airbags. SeeWhen Should an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑31 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags inflate, theyquickly deflate, so quickly that somepeople may not even realize theairbags inflated. Roof-rail airbagsmay still be at least partially inflatedfor some time after they deploy.Some components of the airbagmodule may be hot for severalminutes. For location of the airbagmodules, see What Makes anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑32.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors(if equipped with power door locks),turn the interior lamps on, flash thehazard warning flashers, turn offthe radio, and shut off the fuelsystem after the airbag inflates.



You can lock the doors again byusing the door lock. The interiorlamps and hazard warning flasherswill deactivate after approximately15 minutes.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. Your vehicle has a crashsensing and diagnostic modulewhich records information aftera crash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑17 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑17.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag system.Improper service can mean thatthe airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemIf the vehicle has one of thepassenger airbag status indicatorspictured in the following illustrations,then the vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator, if equipped,is visible on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorsrefer to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.



United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, eitherthe word ON or OFF, or the symbolfor on or off will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑12.

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag is notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are partof the right front passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

We recommend that rear‐facingchild restraints not be transported inthe vehicle, even if the airbag is off.



A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If your vehicle does not have arear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facinginfant seat.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in a childrestraint.

. The system determines that asmall child is present in abooster seat.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. The right front passenger seat isoccupied by a smaller person,such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.



When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑12.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses thata person of adult size is sittingproperly in the right front passengerseat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.

For some children who haveoutgrown child restraints and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may notturn off the right front passenger'sfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in your vehiclewho has outgrown child restraints

should wear a safety beltproperly— whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3‑60 orSecuring Child Restraints(Center Front Seat Position) onpage 3‑62 or Securing ChildRestraints (Right Front SeatPosition) on page 3‑63.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatbackand adjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.



Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit,secure the child in the childrestraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with yourdealer.

If no rear seat is available, donot install a child restraint in thisvehicle and check with yourdealer.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult‐Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow the

system to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.



Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbagstatus. See “Safety Belts” and“Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportanceof proper restraint use.

If the shoulder portion of the belt ispulled out all the way, the childrestraint locking feature will beengaged. This may unintentionallycause the passenger sensingsystem to turn the airbag off forsome adult size occupants. If thishappens, let the belt go back all theway and start again.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well the

passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend thatyou not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑40 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual have

information about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑15.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, front sensors, or airbagwiring can affect the operation ofthe airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle may havea passenger sensing systemfor the right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensing

system may not operateproperly if the original seat trimis replaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery ortrim designed for a differentvehicle. Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑34.

If you have any questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance arein Step Two of the Customer

Satisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑1or Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) onpage 13‑3.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑1or Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) onpage 13‑3.



In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑12 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑32. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and maynot protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure your airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly.Have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 5‑12 for more information.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat witha lap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑21 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑21.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, thetwo children can be crushedtogether and seriously injured.A safety belt must be used byonly one person at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

might also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder beltsoffer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly becomea 110 kg (240 lb) force on aperson's arms. An infant shouldbe secured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle'sowner, are available in four basic

types. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.



The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit ofthe vehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle's safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance ofinjury, the child restraint must besecured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be securedin vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.See Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑50 for more information.



Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no childis in it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) websiteto locate the nearest child safetyseat inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childis not properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the right front passengerfrontal airbag, no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even thoughit is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always move

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

the front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑34 for additionalinformation.

{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If your vehicle does not have arear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint, werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints not be transported in yourvehicle, even if the airbag is off.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.



Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever you install a childrestraint, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need achild restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments.The following explains how toattach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have asingle attachment (B) to securethe top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for usewith or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for your childrestraint.

If the child restraint does not have atop tether, one can be obtained, inkit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Crew Cab — Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Extended Cab — Rear Seat


j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Front Seat — Regularand Extended Cab without Rear

Seats


For crew cab models, there areexposed metal lower anchors foreach rear outboard seating position,located where the seatback meetsthe back of the seat cushion.

For extended cab models with rearseats, there are exposed metallower anchors for each rear seatingposition, attached to the back wall,near the seat cushion.



To assist you in locating the loweranchors, place your hand in apalm-up position and reach upbetween the seat cushion and theseatback.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover.

CrewCab

The top tether anchors in a crewcab model are located on the backwall behind each rear seatingposition. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.


The top tether anchors in anextended cab model are located onthe center of the back wall behind aremovable cover for the rear seatingpositions. Be sure to use an anchorlocated nearest to the seatingposition where the child restraint willbe placed.



Regular and Extended Cabwithout Rear Seats

For regular and extended cabmodels without rear seats, there is atop tether anchor located behind aremovable cover on the back wallbehind the right front passengerseat. You may have to pull theseatback forward to access theanchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or if

the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑48 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injuredor killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle's

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.



{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if your vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

Crew Cab — Rear Seat

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach the toptether to the top tetheranchor (A). Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Pull the seatback forwardto access the top tetheranchors (A). See Rear

Seats (Extended Cab) onpage 3‑10 or Rear Seats(Crew Cab) on page 3‑10.

2.2. Route the top tetheraccording to your childrestraint instructions andthe following instructions:

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestraint.



If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route thetether under the headrestor head restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

If the position you areusing has a fixed oradjustable headrest orhead restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether around theheadrest or head restraint.

2.3. Attach the top tether to theanchor (A). Make sure thatyou secure the top tetherto the top tether anchorand not to the seatbacklatch (B).

2.4. Push rearward on theseatback until it locks intoits upright position. Pushand pull on the seatback tomake sure it is securedproperly.

3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

3.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

3.2. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

4. Tighten the top tether.



5. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. There shouldbe no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)of movement, for properinstallation.


1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraint

does not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors (D)for the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors (D) in the vehicle.The child restraintinstructions will showyou how.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tighten

the top tether to the top tetheranchor (C). Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Pull on the finger accesstab to remove the coverto access the top tetheranchors (C).

2.2. Route the top tether (A)through the loop (B) atthe top of the seatbackto attach the top tetherto the nearest top tetheranchor (C).



3. Tighten the lower anchorattachments and the top tether.The child restraint instructionswill show you how.


Front Seat — Regular/Extended Cab without RearSeats

The vehicle has a right frontpassenger airbag and may alsohave a passenger sensing system.If the vehicle has a passengersensing system it is designed toturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag when an infant in arear-facing infant seat or a smallchild in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected.

See Securing Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3‑60 orSecuring Child Restraints (CenterFront Seat Position) on page 3‑62or Securing Child Restraints (RightFront Seat Position) on page 3‑63and Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑34 for important safetyinformation and additionalinformation on installing a childrestraint in the right front seatposition.

1. See Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) onpage 3‑60 or Securing ChildRestraints (Center Front SeatPosition) on page 3‑62 orSecuring Child Restraints(Right Front Seat Position) onpage 3‑63 for instructions oninstalling the child restraint usingthe safety belts.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Pull the seatback forwardto access the top tetheranchor. See SeatbackLatches on page 3‑7.

2.2. Pull on the finger accesstab to remove the coverto access the top tetheranchor.



2.3. Route the top tetheraccording to your childrestraint instructions andthe following instructions:

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route thetether under the headrestor head restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed or adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the headrest orhead restraint.

3. Attach and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions.




Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

system inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position)When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If your child restraint has theLATCH system, see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑50 for how toinstall your child restraint usingLATCH. If you secure a childrestraint using a safety belt andit uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑50 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



If your child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to securethe child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If you need to install more thanone child restraint in the rear seat,be sure to read Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑48.


2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would beable to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. If your child restraint has a toptether, attach the top tetherto the top tether anchor. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑50.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 6.

7. Tighten the top tether. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑50.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle’s safety beltand let it go back all the way. If thetop tether is attached to a top tetheranchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition)

{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.



Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑48.

In addition, the vehicle may have apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger's frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑34 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑12 for more informationon this, including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, hasturned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, no

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

system is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑34 for additionalinformation.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, a childrestraint should not be installed inyour vehicle, even if the airbagis off.



If your child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑50 for how andwhere to install your child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑50 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back asit will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restraintmanufacturer recommends usinga top tether anchor, attach thetop tether to the top tetheranchor. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑50.

7. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 7.

8. Tighten the top tether. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑50.

9. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.



If the vehicle is equipped with thepassenger sensing system, andwhen the passenger sensing systemhas turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator on the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑12.

If a child restraint has been installedand on indicator is lit, see “If the OnIndicator is Lit for a Child Restraint”under Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑34 for more information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxLift up on the glove box lever toopen it.

CupholdersThis vehicle may havetwo cupholders located on the lowerpart of the front doors as well astwo cupholders located at the frontend of the console. Vehicles withbench seats may have cupholdersattached to the front of thecenter seat.

For vehicles that are an extendedcab or crew cab model, the vehiclealso has two rear cupholders. Oncrew cab models, the cupholdersare located at the front end of therear center seat cushion. Thecupholder can be removed forcleaning by pressing the tab belowthe cupholder and sliding thecupholder forward.

On extended cab models, the rearseat cupholders are located on topof the rear center console.

Vehicles with ashtrays will useone of the cupholders.


4-2 Storage

Rear StorageExtended cab models might havestorage compartments under therear seats.

To access the storagecompartments, lift the cushion onthe bottom of the rear seats. Thisexposes the storage boxes underthe seat.

To open a storage box, unhook thebottom and lift the two latches oneach side of the storage box.

Lift the lid from the center area toaccess the storage box.


Storage 4-3

Center Console StorageFor vehicles with bench seats, theremay be a center armrest storagearea. Lift up on the upper tablocated at the front of the armrest torelease the latch to open.

For vehicles with bucket seats oruplevel packages, the vehicle mayhave a two-tiered center armreststorage area. Lift up on the upperor lower tab at the front of thearmrest to open the upper or lowerstorage area.


4-4 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-2Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Chime Level Adjustment . . . . . . 5-7Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-12Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-14MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-18

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-25Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-25Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-26Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-26Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-27Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-28Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-28


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

The steering wheel adjustment leveris located on the left side of thesteering wheel.

To adjust:

1. Hold the steering wheel and pullthe lever toward you.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Release the lever to lock thewheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

HornTo sound the horn, press the hornsymbol on the steering wheel pad.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper controls arelocated on the multifunction lever.They are controlled by turning theband with thisz symbol.

The windshield wipers work inall ignition positions, exceptLOCK/OFF. This includes theRetained Access Power mode. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑33.



Move the band to one of thefollowing positions:

8 (Mist): Single wipe, move theband toz and then release it.Several wipes, hold the bandonz longer.

N (Adjustable Interval Wipes):For a delayed wiping cycle. Turn theband up for more frequent wipes ordown for less frequent wipes.

6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes,turn the band to the first solidposition past the delay settings.

1 (High Speed): Fast wipes,turn the band to the second solidposition past the delay settings.

9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced.

Windshield Washer

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do notuse your washer until thewindshield is warmed. Otherwisethe washer fluid can form ice onthe windshield, blocking yourvision.

QL (Washer Fluid): Push thepaddle on top of the multifunctionlever to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers will clearthe window and then either stop orreturn to your preset speed.

Compass

Compass Operation

Press Y b or depending on the

mirror, press O once to turn thedisplay on or off.

Compass Calibration

The compass may needcalibration if:. CAL is displayed while driving in

the vehicle.. After approximately five seconds,

the display does not show acompass heading, N for North,for example, there may be astrong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Interferencecan be caused by a magneticantenna mount, magneticnote pad holder, or a similarmagnetic item.

. The compass does not displaythe correct heading and thecompass zone variance is setcorrectly.



To calibrate, CAL must be displayedin the mirror compass windows.If CAL is not displayed, press andhold Y b / O for several seconds oruntil CAL is displayed.

The compass can be calibrated bydriving the vehicle in circles at8 km/h (5 mph) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

Compass Variance

The mirror is set to zone eight.If you do not live in zone eight ordrive out of the area, the compassvariance needs to be changed tothe appropriate zone.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find the current location andvariance zone number on thefollowing zone map.

2. Press and hold Y b / O untilZ and/or a zone numberdisplays.

3. Press Y b / O repeatedly untilthe new zone number displays.After you stop pressing thebutton, the display shows acompass direction within afew seconds.

Clock

AM-FM Radio

Press and hold HR until the correcthour displays. Press and hold MINuntil the correct minute displays.There is an initial two-second delaybefore the clock goes into time-setmode. To display the time with theignition off, press RCL, HR, or MIN.


Press and hold the HR button untilthe correct hour displays. Press andhold the MIN button until the correctminute displays. The time can beset with the ignition on or off.



To synchronize the time with anFM station broadcasting Radio DataSystem (RDS) information, pressand hold the HR and MIN buttonsat the same time until RDS TIMEdisplays. To accept this time, pressand hold the HR and MIN buttons,at the same time, for anothertwo seconds. If the time is notavailable from the station,NO UPDAT (update) displays.

RDS time is broadcast once aminute. After tuning to an RDSbroadcast station, it could take afew minutes for the time to update.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle may have an accessorypower outlet located below theclimate control system and on therear of the center console. Removethe cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessoriesmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle and adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑70.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.



Cigarette LighterTo use the lighter, press it in all theway, and let go. When it is ready, itwill pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.

AshtraysThe vehicle may have a removableashtray and cigarette lighter.

The ashtray is located in the centerconsole area. The ashtray can beremoved for cleaning. When theashtray is removed, this area canalso be used as a cupholder.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.



Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust thevehicle's chime level. To change thevolume level of the chime, pressand hold pushbutton 6 with theignition on and the radio power off.The volume level will change fromthe normal level to loud, and LOUDwill appear on the radio display.

To change back to the default ornormal setting, press and holdpushbutton 6 again. The volumelevel will change from the loudlevel to normal, and NORMAL willappear on the radio display. Eachtime the chime volume is changed,three chimes will sound to indicatethe new volume selected. Removingthe radio and not replacing it with afactory radio or chime module willdisable vehicle chimes.



Instrument Cluster

English Automatic Transmission 2.9L Shown, Metric, Manual Transmission, 3.7L and 5.3L Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the speedin both miles per hour (mph) andkilometers per hour (km/h).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eithermiles (used in the United States) orkilometers (used in Canada).

The odometer mileage can bechecked without the vehicle runningby pressing the trip informationstem. See “Odometer” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21 for more information.

If the cluster is replaced the newone will automatically detect andupdate the vehicle's accumulatedmileage.

Trip OdometerThe vehicle has a trip odometer thatindicates how far the vehicle hasbeen driven since the trip odometerwas last set to zero.

See “Trip Odometer” under DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.



Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows how much fuel thevehicle has remaining in thefuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseindicate a problem with the vehicle'sfuel gauge:. At the gas station, the gas pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or lessfuel to fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge does not go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

When the fuel in the fuel tank islow, a LOW FUEL message willdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑27 for moreinformation.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the gauge pointer is near thetop of the gauge, the engineis too hot. It means that theengine coolant has overheated.



If the vehicle has been operatingunder normal driving conditions, pullthe vehicle off the road, stop thevehicle and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑24 for more information.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

When the engine is started, a chimesounds for several seconds toremind a driver to fasten the safetybelt, unless the driver safety belt isalready buckled.

The safety belt light comes on andstays on for several seconds, thenflashes for several more.

This chime and light are repeated ifthe driver remains unbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion. If the driversafety belt is already buckled,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt reminderlight, several seconds after theengine is started, a chime soundsfor several seconds to remind thefront passenger to buckle theirsafety belt. The passenger safetybelt light, located on the instrumentpanel, comes on and stays on forseveral seconds and then flashesfor several more.

This chime and light are repeated ifthe passenger remains unbuckledand the vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.



Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag'selectrical system for possiblemalfunctions. If the light stays onit indicates there is an electricalproblem. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑28.

The airbag readiness light flashesfor a few seconds when the engineis started. If the light does not comeon then, have it fixed immediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, an airbag Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message can alsocome on. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑24 for more information.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorIf the vehicle has one of thepassenger airbag status indicatorspictured in the following illustrations,then the vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator is on theinstrument panel. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑34 forimportant safety information.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorsrefer to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.



United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may bea problem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑12 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to START, butthe engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can also appear.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑24 for moreinformation. This light could indicatethat there are problems with agenerator drive belt, or that thereis an electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light should come on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.



Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement ofthe original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered bythe vehicle warranty. Thiscould also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemissions system malfunction:. Make sure the fuel cap is

fully installed. See Filling theTank on page 9‑57. Thediagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Make sure the electrical systemis not wet. The system couldbe wet if the vehicle wasdriven through a deep puddle ofwater. The condition is usuallycorrected when the electricalsystem dries out. A few drivingtrips should turn the light off.



. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and cancause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will requireat least one full tank of theproper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑55.

If none of the above have madethe light turn off, your dealer cancheck the vehicle. The dealerhas the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial andlocal governments may haveprograms to inspect theon-vehicle emission controlequipment. For the inspection,the emission system test equipmentis connected to the vehicle’s DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. This can happen ifthe battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic systemevaluates critical emissioncontrol systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection, your dealer canprepare the vehicle forinspection.



Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

If the warning light comes on, therecould be a brake problem. Have thebrake system inspected right away.

English Metric

This light comes on briefly when theignition key is turned to ON/RUN.If it does not, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn if there is aproblem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑47 formore information. The light stayson if the parking brake does notrelease fully. If it stays on after theparking brake is fully released, itmeans there is a brake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop. The brakepedal might be harder to push, or itmight go closer to the floor. It cantake longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑93.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on after

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

the vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.



If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑17.

See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑25 for all brake related DICmessages.

Up-Shift Light

The vehicle may have an up-shiftlight.

When this light comes on, shift tothe next higher gear if weather,road, and traffic conditions allow.

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑40 for more information.

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) indicator/warning lightcomes on briefly while starting theengine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

The light flashes while theStabiliTrak system and TCS areworking to assist the driver withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions.



If the StabiliTrak system and TCSlight comes on and stays on whiledriving and a TRACTION FAULT orSERVICE STAB SYS messagedisplays on the DIC, the vehicleneeds service.

The light also comes on steadywhen the StabiliTrak system and/orTCS are turned off. The DIC alsodisplays a TRAC OFF and/or STABSYS OFF message. If the TCS isoff, wheel spin is not limited. If theStabiliTrak system is off, the systemdoes not assist the driver withdirectional control of the vehicle.The light turns off when the TCSand StabiliTrak system are turnedback on.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑50, Traction Control System(TCS) on page 9‑48 and RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑27 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engineis started. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑28 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information Label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑56 formore information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays onsteady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑60 for moreinformation.



Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thengoes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and it mighthave some other system problem.

Security Light

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Anti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑9.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.



Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑52 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC)displays information such as the tripodometer, personalization features,and warning messages. The DICdisplay is located on the instrumentpanel cluster.

Operation and Displays

The Driver Information Center (DIC)comes on when the ignition is on.

If a problem is detected, a warningmessage appears on the display.Pressing and releasing the tripodometer reset stem on the DICacknowledges some currentwarnings or service messages.Some messages only clear after therequired action has been taken.

The DIC has different menu itemswhich can be accessed by pressingthe trip odometer reset stem on theDIC. This includes trip information,such as the odometer and tripodometer, engine oil life reset,and personalization features thatare explained in the followinginformation. The DIC trip odometerreset stem is located on theinstrument panel cluster next tothe DIC display.

Trip Information

Odometer

The odometer is automaticallydisplayed on the DIC when you startthe vehicle. The odometer showsthe total distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles for theUnited States or kilometers forCanada.



Trip Odometer

Press and release the reset stemuntil TRIP appears on the DICdisplay. The trip odometer showsthe current distance traveled sincethe last reset of the trip odometer ineither miles for the United States orkilometers for Canada.

To reset the trip odometer, pressand hold the reset stem until thedisplay returns to zero.

Engine Oil Life System

With the engine off, turn the keyto ON/RUN and then press thereset stem until OIL LIFE RESETappears — alternating between OILLIFE and RESET — on the DICdisplay. The CHANGE OIL messagealerts you to change the oil on aschedule consistent with yourdriving conditions. Always resetthe OIL LIFE message after an oilchange. To reset the message,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑14.

In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑10 andScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Personalization Features

Language

This feature allows you to choosethe language in which the DICdisplay shows information.

To set your choice for this feature:

1. With the engine off, turn the keyto ON/RUN, but do not start theengine.

2. Close all doors so the DOORSmessage does not display inthe DIC.

3. Momentarily press and releasethe reset stem until the currentlanguage is displayed: English(default), Spanish, or French.

4. To select a different language,press and hold the reset stemuntil the next language appears.

5. Repeat Step 4 until the desiredlanguage is displayed. Once thedesired language is shown onthe DIC display, the languageis set.

6. To exit the language selection,momentarily press and releasethe reset stem. All DICmessages will now displayin the language selected.

Automatic Door Locks

This feature allows you to programthe door locks to a preferred setting.


1. With the engine off, turn the keyto LOCK/OFF. Do not removethe key from the ignition.

2. Press and hold the power doorlock button until the DIC displayshows the current doorlock mode.



3. To view the next availablemode, press and hold the resetstem until the mode appears.Release the reset stem andpress and hold again to view thenext mode.

4. Once the desired mode is shownon the DIC display, briefly pressthe reset stem to set yourchoice. The DIC display thenclears.

The following are the availablemodes:

Lock 1 (default): On vehicles withan automatic transmission, thismode locks all of the doors whenthe vehicle is shifted out of P (Park)and unlocks all of the doors whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

On vehicles with a manualtransmission, this mode locks all ofthe doors when the vehicle speed isgreater than 24 km/h (15 mph) andunlocks all of the doors when thekey is removed from the ignition.

Lock 2: On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, this modelocks all of the doors when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park) andunlocks the driver's door when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

On vehicles with a manualtransmission, this mode locks all ofthe doors when the vehicle speed isgreater than 24 km/h (15 mph) andunlocks the driver's door when thekey is removed from the ignition.

Lock 3: On vehicles with anautomatic transmission, this modelocks all of the doors when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).The doors will not automaticallyunlock.

On vehicles with a manualtransmission, this mode locks all ofthe doors when the vehicle speed isgreater than 24 km/h (15 mph). Thedoors will not automatically unlock.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)Feedback

This feature allows you to programthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)feedback to a preferred setting.


1. With the engine off, turn the keyto LOCK/OFF. Do not removethe key from the ignition.

2. Press and hold the lock andunlock buttons on the RKEtransmitter at the same time.Hold both buttons until the DICdisplay shows the current RKEfeedback mode.

3. To view the next available mode,press and hold the reset stemuntil the mode appears. Releasethe reset stem and pressand hold again to view thenext mode.



4. Once the desired mode is shownon the DIC display, briefly pressthe reset stem to set yourchoice. The DIC display thenclears.

The following are the availablemodes:

RFA 1 (default): This mode flashesthe parking lamps when you pressthe lock or unlock buttons on theRKE transmitter.

RFA 2: This mode flashes theparking lamps and sounds the hornwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter. This mode alsoflashes the parking lamps when youpress the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

RFA 3: This mode flashes theparking lamps and sounds the hornwhen you press the lock or unlockbuttons on the RKE transmitter.

RFA 4: This mode disables RKEfeedback. There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock or unlockbuttons on the RKE transmitter.

Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed bythe driver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appearone after another. The messagesare displayed for severalseconds each.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you shouldpress and release the trip odometerreset stem to acknowledge that youreceived the messages and to clearthem from the display. Eachmessage must be acknowledgedindividually.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember

that clearing the messages onlymakes the messages disappear, notcorrect the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayedand some information about them.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

SERVICE CHARG (Charge)SYS (System)

This message displays if there is aproblem with the battery chargingsystem. Under certain conditions,the battery warning light may alsoturn on in the instrument panelcluster. See Charging System Lighton page 5‑14. The battery will notbe charging at an optimal rate andthe vehicle will lose the ability toenter the fuel economy mode.



The vehicle is safe to drive,however have the electrical systemchecked by your dealer. Pressand release the reset stem toacknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

Brake System Messages

ABS (Antilock Brake System)FAULT

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS). Check the ABS assoon as possible and have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeBraking on page 9‑3 and AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑17 for more information.Press and release the reset stemto acknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

BRAKES

This message displays if there is aproblem with the brakes. Check thebrakes as soon as possible andhave your vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Braking on page 9‑3and Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light on page 5‑17 formore information. Press and releasethe reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay.

FLUID

This message displays if the brakefluid is low. Check the brake fluid assoon as possible and have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.See Braking on page 9‑3 for moreinformation. Press and release thereset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay.

PARK BRK (Brake)

This message displays when theparking brake is set. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑47 and AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑17 for more information.The message clears from thedisplay after the parking brakeis released or by pressing andreleasing the reset stem.

Door Ajar Messages

DOORS

This message displays when one ormore of the doors is ajar. Check allthe doors on your vehicle to makesure they are closed. The messageclears from the display after all ofthe doors are closed.



Engine Cooling SystemMessages

AC (Air Conditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohigh and the air conditioning in yourvehicle needs to be turned off. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑24and Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 for more information. Thismessage displays along with theENG HOT message.

ENG (Engine) HOT

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature ishot. Check the engine coolanttemperature gauge. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑10. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer as soonas possible if you suspect theengine is overheating. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑24 formore information.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE OIL

This message displays when the oilneeds to be changed. Check the oilin your vehicle as soon as possibleand have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 formore information. Press and releasethe reset stem to acknowledgethe message and clear it from thedisplay.

OIL

This message displays when the oilpressure is low. See Engine OilPressure Light on page 5‑20 andEngine Oil on page 10‑10 for moreinformation.

Engine Power Messages

REDUCED POWER

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but thereis no reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may bereduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer for service assoon as possible. Press and releasethe reset stem to acknowledgethe message and clear it from thedisplay.



Fuel System Messages

FUEL CAP

This message displays if thevehicle's fuel cap is either off orloose. Pull over as soon as possibleand check to see if the fuel cap issecure. You may also see the checkengine light on the instrument panelcluster. If the check engine lightdoes come on when the fuel capwas loose, it may take a few drivingtrips before the light turns off. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑14 for more informationif the light still remains on. Pressand release the reset stem toacknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

LOW FUEL

This message displays if the level offuel in the vehicle is low. Also checkthe fuel gauge. See Fuel Gauge onpage 5‑10 for more information.Refill the fuel tank as soon aspossible.

Lamp Messages

TURN SIGNAL

This message displays when theturn signal is on for about 1.2 km(0.75 miles) of travel. Pressand release the reset stem toacknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STAB (Stability) SYS(System)

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑50 for more information.

STAB (Stability) SYS(System) OFF

This message displays when theStabiliTrak system is turned off. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑50for more information.



TRAC (Traction) OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS)is turned off by pressing theStabiliTrak button. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑50 for moreinformation.

TRACTION FAULT

This message will display if there isa problem with the TCS. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑50 for more information.Press and release the reset stemto acknowledge the message andclear it from the display.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERV (Service) VEH (Vehicle)

This message displays if yourvehicle needs service. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer assoon as possible.

Tire Messages

LOW TIRE

This message displays if a low tirepressure is detected in any of thevehicle's tires. Press and releasethe reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from thedisplay. The message appears ateach ignition cycle until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflationpressure. See Tires on page 10‑50and Tire Pressure on page 10‑56 formore information on tires and thecorrect inflation pressures.

SERV (Service) TPM(Tire Pressure Monitor)

This message displays if a part onthe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) is not working properly.The tire pressure light also flashesand then remains on during thesame ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑19.

Several conditions may cause thismessage to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑60 for more information.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer.

Transmission Messages

SERV (Service) 4WD(Four-Wheel Drive)

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transfer casecontrol system. Check the transfercase on your vehicle and haveit serviced by your dealer. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 9‑42 formore information about the transfercase. Press and release the resetstem to acknowledge the messageand clear it from the display.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesExit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel on the leftside of the steering wheel.

O (Exterior Lamps): Turn theknob, located to the right of thissymbol, to choose one of thefour exterior lamp positions.

O (Off): Turns off all exterior lampsincluding the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

AUTO: Turns the headlamps onautomatically at normal brightness,together with the following:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

See Automatic Headlamp Systemon page 6‑3 for more information.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps, together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.


6-2 Lighting

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turnedon and the key is out of the ignition.To turn off the chime, turn theheadlamp switch to off and thenback on. In the automatic mode,the headlamps turn off once theignition is in LOCK/OFF.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,if the parking lamps are turned onmanually, the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) will stay on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you toturn the high beams on.

Pull the lever towards you to returnto low beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signala driver in front of you that youwant to pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps willturn on. They will stay on as longas the lever is held toward you.

The high-beam indicator on theinstrument panel cluster will comeon. Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system will come on whenthe following conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The transmission is not in

P (Park) if you have anautomatic transmission.

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.


Lighting 6-3

When the DRL are on, only theparking lamps or reduced intensitylow beam headlamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarkers, andother lamps will not be on. Theinstrument panel will not be lit upeither.

When it begins to get dark, theheadlamps will automatically switchfrom DRL to the regular headlamps.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system will turnon after the transmission has beenshifted from P (Park) to D (Drive).The headlamps, taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, roofmarker lamps, and the instrumentpanel lights turn on at normalbrightness. The radio lights willbecome dimmer when theheadlights are off compared towhen the headlights are on.

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel. Do not cover the sensor,or the system will be on wheneverthe ignition is on.

The system can turn on theheadlamps when driving in aparking garage, through a tunnel orwhen there is overcast weather.This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp system so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The DRL and automaticheadlamp system will only beaffected when the light sensordetects a change in lighting lastinglonger than the delay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem will come on immediately.

Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it will take about 1 minute for theautomatic headlamp system tochange to DRL if it is light outside.During that delay, the instrumentpanel cluster may not be as brightas usual. Make sure the instrumentpanel brightness control is in thefull bright position. See InstrumentPanel Illumination Control onpage 6‑5.

Hazard Warning Flashers| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button located on theinstrument panel, to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. This warns others that youare having trouble.

Press| again to turn theflashers off.

The turn signals do not work whilethe hazard warning flashers are on.


6-4 Lighting

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is complete.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb maybe burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If thebulb is not burned out, check thefuse. For bulb replacement, seeTaillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps on page 10‑39.For a blown fuse or circuit breaker,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑43.

Turn Signal On Chime

If a turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (3/4 of a mile), a chimewill sound at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURNSIGNAL will also appear in the DIC.To turn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

See “TURN SIGNAL” under LampMessages on page 5‑27 for moreinformation.

Fog LampsThe fog lamp button is located nearthe exterior lamps control.

# : For vehicles with fog lamps,press to turn the fog lamps on or off.An indicator light will turn on in thebutton when the fog lamps are on.

The parking lamps or low‐beamheadlamps must be on for the foglamps to work. The fog lamps willgo off whenever the high-beamheadlamps come on. When the highbeams go off, the fog lamps comeon again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.


Lighting 6-5

Exterior Cargo LampsThe cargo lamps (if equipped) canbe used if more light is needed inthe cargo area of the vehicle or inthe top-box storage units.

This button is located on the driverside of the instrument panel nearthe exterior lamp control.

Press to turn the cargo lamps onand off.

The dome lamps must be on for thecargo lamps to come on. See DomeLamps on page 6‑6.

If the vehicle is equipped withBluetooth®, turning the instrumentpanel illumination controlthumbwheel all the way up willturn on the cargo lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlD (Instrument Panel Lights):Turn the thumbwheel up or down tobrighten or dim the instrument panellights and the radio display. Theinstrument panel lights, cluster, andradio display do not dim to completedarkness. Turning the thumbwheelall the way up will turn on the domelamps and may also turn on thecargo lamp, if the vehicle isequipped with Bluetooth.

The instrument panel lightbrightness control will only work ifthe headlamps or parking lamps areon. See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.


6-6 Lighting

Dome LampsThe dome lamps come on when anydoor is opened.

To manually turn on the domelamps, turn the thumbwheel, locatednext to the exterior lamps control, allthe way up. The cargo lamps maycome on, if the vehicle is equippedwith Bluetooth. In this position, thelamps remain on whether a door isopened or closed.

Reading Lamps

Press the lens on the lamps to turneach reading lamp on or off.

These lamps will not come on withthe dome lamps.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated below the exterior lampscontrol.

E (Dome Lamp Override): Pressthis button in to make the domelamps remain off when the doorsare open. To return the lamps toautomatic operation, pressE againand return it to the out position.

Lighting Features

Exit LightingThe interior lamps will come onwhen the key is removed from theignition. The lamps will not comeon if the dome override button ispressed in.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.


Lighting 6-7

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays,it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑21.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the domelamp if it is left on for more than20 minutes when the ignition is inLOCK/OFF. This helps to preventthe battery from running down.


6-8 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-14Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-14

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

IntroductionDetermine which radio the vehiclehas and read the following pages tobecome familiar with its features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods couldcause a crash resulting in injuryor death to you or others. Donot give extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.


7-2 Infotainment System

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the vehicle'sengine, radio, or other systems,and could damage them. Followfederal rules covering mobileradio and telephone equipment.

Notice: The chime signalsrelated to safety belts, parkingbrake, and other functions ofyour vehicle operate through theradio/entertainment system.

If that equipment is replaced oradditional equipment is addedto your vehicle, the chimesmay not work. Make sure thatreplacement or additionalequipment is compatible withyour vehicle before installingit. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑33 for moreinformation.

Theft-Deterrent Feature

Non-RDS Radios

TheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of yourvehicle's radio. The featureworks automatically by learning aportion of the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). If the radio is movedto a different vehicle, it does notoperate and LOC displays.

With TheftLock activated, the radiodoes not operate if stolen.



RDS Radios

TheftLock is designed to discouragetheft of your vehicle's radio. Thefeature works automatically bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If theradio is moved to a different vehicle,it does not operate and LOCKEDdisplays.

When the radio and vehicle areturned off, the blinking red lightindicates that TheftLock is armed.

With TheftLock activated, the radiodoes not operate if stolen.

Operation

AM-FM Radio




Playing the Radio

AM-FM Radio

PWR (Power): Press to turn thesystem on and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn to increase orto decrease the volume.

RCL (Recall): Press to switch thedisplay between the radio stationfrequency, band, and the time.When the ignition is off, press todisplay the time.


PWR (Power): Press to turn thesystem on and off.

o VOL p (Volume): Turn toincrease or to decrease the volume.

DISPL (Display): When the ignitionis turned off, press to displaythe time.

For RDS, press the DISPL knobto change what displays whileusing RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS stationfrequency, PTY (program type),and the name of the program(if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press theDISPL knob while in XM mode toretrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title,Category or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.



To change the default on thedisplay, press the DISPL knobuntil you see the desired display,then press and hold this knobfor two seconds and the radiobeeps once.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume):Automatic volume automaticallyadjusts the audio system to makeup for road and wind noise whiledriving. The volume level shouldalways sound the same whiledriving.

Set the volume at the desired level.Press to select LOW, MEDIUM, andHIGH. AVOL displays. Each highersetting allows for higher volumecompensation at faster vehiclespeeds.

NONE displays if the radio cannotdetermine the vehicle speed. To turnautomatic volume off, press untilOFF displays.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AM-FM Radio

To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press and release the AUDIObutton until BAS (bass) or TRE(treble) displays.

2. Press and hold thew orx button to increase or todecrease the tone.

To adjust the bass or treble to thecenter position:

1. Press and release the AUDIObutton until BAS (bass) orTRE (treble) displays.

2. Press and hold the AUDIObutton for more thantwo seconds until a beepsounds.

To adjust both tone controls andboth speaker controls to the middleposition:

1. Exit out of audio mode bypressing another button, causingthe radio to perform that functionor wait five seconds for thedisplay to return to time of day.

2. Press and hold AUDIO for morethan two seconds until a beepsounds. CEN (center) displays.


To adjust the bass or treble:

1. Press and release the AUDIOknob until BASS (bass) orTREB (treble) displays.

2. Turn the AUDIO knob toincrease or to decreasethe tone.

To adjust the bass/treble to themiddle position, press and hold theAUDIO knob. The radio producesone beep and adjusts the displaylevel to the middle position.



To adjust all tone and speakercontrols to the middle position, pushand hold the AUDIO knob when notone or speaker control displays.ALL CENTERED displays and abeep sounds.

AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press to selectcustomized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz,talk, pop, rock, and classical.

To return to the manual mode, pressthe AUTO EQ button until CUSTOMdisplays. Then manually adjust thebass/treble, using the AUDIO knob.

Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

Fade may not be available if thevehicle is a regular cab model.

AM-FM Radio

To adjust balance or fade:

1. Press and release the AUDIObutton until BAL (balance) orFAD (fade) displays.

2. Press and hold thew orx button to increase or todecrease the level.

To adjust the balance or fade to thecenter position:

1. Press and release the AUDIObutton until BAL (balance) orFAD (fade) displays.

2. Press and hold the AUDIObutton for more thantwo seconds until a beepsounds.

To adjust both speaker controls andboth tone controls to the middleposition:

1. Exit out of audio mode bypressing another button, causingthe radio to perform that functionor wait five seconds for thedisplay to return to time of day.

2. Press and hold AUDIO for morethan two seconds until a beepsounds. CEN (center) displays.


To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press and release the AUDIOknob until BAL (balance) orFADE (fade) displays.

2. Turn the AUDIO knob toincrease or to decrease thelevel.

To adjust the balance or fade to themiddle position:

1. Press and release the AUDIOknob until BAL (balance) orFADE (fade) displays.

2. Press and hold the AUDIO knobuntil one beep sounds.

To adjust all tone and speakercontrols to the middle position, pushand hold the AUDIO knob when notone or speaker control displays.ALL CENTERED displays and abeep sounds.



Radio Messages

AM-FM Radio

CAL (Calibration Error): Theaudio system has been calibratedfor the vehicle from the factory.If CAL displays it means that theradio has not been configuredproperly for the vehicle and it mustbe returned to your dealer forservice.

LOC (Locked): This messagedisplays when the THEFTLOCK®

system has locked up. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.


CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Theaudio system has been calibratedfor the vehicle from the factory.If CAL ERR displays it means thatthe radio has not been configuredproperly for the vehicle and it mustbe returned to your dealer forservice.

LOCKED: This message displayswhen the THEFTLOCK® system haslocked up. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Finding a Station

AM-FM Radio

AM FM: Press to switch betweenFM1, FM2, or AM.

TUNE: Turn to select radiostations.

o SEEK: Press to go to theprevious station and stay there.

To scan stations, press andhold o SEEK for two secondsuntil a beep sounds. The radiogoes to a station, plays for a fewseconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press o SEEK again tostop scanning.



To scan preset stations, pressand hold o SEEK for more thanfour seconds until two beeps sound.The radio goes to the first presetstation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next preset station.Press o SEEK again to stopscanning presets.

SEEK p : Press to go to the nextstation and stay there.

To scan stations, press and holdSEEK p for two seconds until abeep sounds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. PressSEEK p again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, pressand hold SEEK p for more thanfour seconds until two beeps sound.The radio goes to the first presetstation stored on the pushbuttons,plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next preset station. PressSEEK p again to stop scanningpresets.



q TUNE r : Turn to select radiostations.

q SEEK r : Press to go to theprevious or next station and staythere.

q SCAN r : Press and hold formore than two seconds, SCANdisplays and the radio beeps once.The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press q or r again, tostop scanning presets.

To scan preset stations, pressand hold q or r for more thanfour seconds, PSCN displays andthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a preset station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the nextpreset station. Press q or r again,to stop scanning presets.

Radio Data System (RDS)

The Radio with CD (MP3/WMA)has an RDS system. RDS featuresare available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDSinformation.

With RDS, the radio can do thefollowing:. Seek to stations broadcasting

the selected type ofprogramming.

. Receive announcementsconcerning local and nationalemergencies.

. Display messages from radiostations.

. Seek to stations with trafficannouncements.



This system relies upon receivingspecific information from thesestations and only works when theinformation is available. In rarecases, a radio station couldbroadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDSstation, the station name or callletters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations can alsoprovide the time of day, a programtype (PTY) for current programming,and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: The Alert feature warnsof local or national emergencies.When an alert announcementcomes on the current radiostation, ALERT! displays. Theannouncement is heard, even if thevolume is low or a CD is playing.

If a CD is playing, play stopsduring the announcement. Alertannouncements cannot beturned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests ofthe emergency broadcast system.This feature is not supported by allRDS stations.

INFO (Information): If thecurrent station has a message,the information symbol or INFOdisplays. Press this button to seethe message. The message candisplay the artist, song title, call inphone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is notdisplayed, parts of the messagedisplay every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, pressand release the INFO button. A newgroup of words displays after everypress of this button. Once thecomplete message has displayed,the information symbol or INFOdisappears from the display untilanother new message is received.

The last message can be displayedby pressing the INFO button. Thelast message stays on the displayuntil a new message is received orthe radio is tuned to a differentstation.

When a message is not availablefrom a station, NO INFO displays.

TRAF (Traffic): TRAF displayswhen the station tuned tobroadcasts traffic announcements.When a traffic announcement isbroadcast on this station you willhear it.

If the station does not broadcasttraffic announcements, press theTRAF button and the radio seeksto a station that does. When astation that broadcasts trafficannouncements is found, the radiostops seeking and TRAF displays.If no station is found that broadcaststraffic announcements, NO TRAFdisplays.

If TRAF displays, press the TRAFbutton to turn off the trafficannouncements.



The radio plays the trafficannouncement if the volume islow. The radio interrupts the playof a CD if the last tuned stationbroadcasts traffic announcements.

Finding a Program Type (PTY)Station

To select and find a PTY station:

1. Turn the P-TYPE knob. TYPEand a PTY displays.

2. Turn the P-TYPE knob again, toselect a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY displays,press the SEEK / TYPE buttonto select PTY's first station.

4. To go to another stationwithin that PTY, press theSEEK / TYPE button twice todisplay the PTY and then go toanother station.

To cancel the seek, press theSEEK / TYPE button. This also exitsthe program type seek mode andreturns to the last tuned station.

If both PTY and TRAF (traffic) areon, the radio searches for stationswith the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

If the radio cannot find the desiredprogram type, NONE displays andthe radio returns to the last tunedstation.

SCAN: To scan PTYs, press andhold the SEEK / SCAN until a beepsounds. The radio goes to a station,plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next station.

BAND (Alternate Frequency):Alternate frequency lets the radioswitch to a stronger station withthe same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press andhold BAND for two seconds. AF ONdisplays. The radio could switch tostations with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off,press and hold BAND again for2 seconds. AF OFF displays. Theradio does not switch to otherstations.

DISPL (Display): Press to changewhat information displays whileusing RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS stationfrequency, PTY (program type),and the name of the program(if available).

Setting Preset PTYs Only

The six pushbuttons have factoryPTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs(6 FM1 and 6 FM2), can beprogrammed on the numberedpushbuttons. To program PTYs:

1. Press BAND to select FM1or FM2.

2. Turn the P‐TYPE knob toactivate program type selectmode. TYPE and the lastselected PTY displays.

3. Turn the P‐TYPE knob to selecta PTY.



4. Press and hold one of thesix numbered pushbuttons untila beep sounds. When thatnumbered pushbutton ispressed, the PTY that was set,returns.

5. Repeat the steps for eachpushbutton.

Setting Preset Stations

If the radio does not have XM, up to18 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2, and6 AM) can be programmed on thesix numbered pushbuttons.

If the radio has XM, up to30 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2, 6 AM,6 XM1, and 6 XM2) can beprogrammed on the six numberedpushbuttons.

To program either radio:

1. Tune in the desired station.

2. Press and hold one of thesix numbered pushbuttons untilthe radio beeps once. When that

numbered pushbutton is pressedagain, the station that wasstored, returns.


Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service thatis based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radiohas a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is requiredto receive the XM service. Formore information, contact XMat www.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.and www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Finding a Program Type (PTY)Channel

To select and find a PTY:

1. Turn the P-TYPE knob. TYPEand a PTY displays.

2. Turn the P-TYPE knob again, toselect a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY displays,press the SEEK / TYPE buttonto select PTY's first station.

4. To go to another station withinthat PTY, pess the SEEK / TYPEbutton twice to display the PTYand then go to another station.

To cancel the seek, press theSEEK / TYPE button. This also exitsthe program type seek mode andreturns to the last tuned station.

If the radio cannot find the desiredprogram type, NONE displays andthe radio returns to the last tunedstation.



Finding an XM Channel


DISPL (Display): Press toretrieve four different categoriesof information related to thecurrent song or channel: Artist,Song Title, Category or PTY,Channel Number/Channel Name.

q TUNE r : Turn to select XMChannels.

q SEEK r : Press to go to theprevious or next channel and staythere.

q SCAN r : Press and hold formore than two seconds, SCANdisplays and the radio beeps once.The radio goes to a channel, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to thenext channel. Press q or r again,to stop scanning presets.

To scan preset channels, pressand hold q or r for more thanfour seconds, PSCN displays andthe radio beeps once. The radiogoes to a preset channel, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the nextpreset channel. Press q or r again,to stop scanning presets.

Setting Preset Channels

If the radio has XM, up to30 stations (6 FM1, 6 FM2,6 AM, 6 XM1, and 6 XM2)can be programmed on thesix numbered pushbuttons.

To program either radio:

1. Tune in the desired channel.

2. Press and hold one of thesix numbered pushbuttons untilthe radio beeps once. When thatnumbered pushbutton is pressedagain, the channel that wasstored, returns.


XM Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, orany others, can be blocked at acustomer's request, by calling1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated,and no action is required. Thisprocess should take no longer than30 seconds.

No Signl: The system isfunctioning correctly, but thevehicle is in a location that isblocking the XM signal. When thevehicle is moved into an open area,the signal should return.

Loading: The radio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Off Air: This channel is notcurrently in service. Tune toanother channel.



CH Unavl: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station forthat preset button.

Unauth: This channel is blocked orcannot be received with your XMSubscription package.

No Info: No artist, song title,category, or text information isavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

NotFound: No artist, song title,category, or text information isavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.

XM Lock: The XM receiver in yourvehicle could have previously beenin another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingyour vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

Radio ID: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check XM: If this message doesnot clear within a short period oftime, the receiver could have a fault.Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 miles).Although the radio has a built-inelectronic circuit that automaticallyworks to reduce interference, somestatic can occur, especially aroundtall buildings or hills, causing thesound to fade in and out.



XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Justas with FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna canwithstand most car washes withoutbeing damaged as long as it issecurely attached to the base.If the mast becomes slightly bent,straighten it out by hand. If the mastis badly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check to make surethe antenna is tightened to its base.If tightening is required, tightenby hand until fully seated plusone quarter turn.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

Audio Players

CD Player

Care of The CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD, itcould get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised, due to the riskof contaminating the lens of the CDoptics with lubricants internal to theCD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.



While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the soundquality can be reduced due to CD-Rquality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-Rhas been handled. Handle themcarefully. Store CD-R(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this could

damage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Playing a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it in,and READING displays. The CDshould begin playing. To inserta CD with the ignition off, firstpress theZ (eject) button or theDISPL knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts toplay where it stopped, if it was thelast selected audio source.

When the CD is inserted, the CDsymbol displays. As each new trackstarts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller8 cm (3 in) single CDs with anadapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

3 REV (Fast Reverse): Press andhold to reverse quickly within atrack. Press and hold for less thantwo seconds to reverse at 10 timesthe normal playing speed. Pressand hold for more than two secondsto reverse at 20 times the normalplaying speed. Release to play thetrack.

4 FWD (Fast Forward): Press andhold to advance quickly within atrack. Press and hold for less thantwo seconds to advance at six timesthe normal playing speed. Pressand hold for more than two secondsto advance at 17 times the normalplaying speed. Release to play thetrack.



6RDM (Random): Press to hearthe tracks in random, rather thansequential, order. RDM ON displays.RDM and the track number displayswhen each track starts to play.Press again to turn off random play.RDM OFF displays.

q SEEK r : Press the left arrow togo to the start of the current or theprevious track. Press the right arrowto go to the start of the next track.Pressing either arrow for more thantwo seconds scans the next tracks,playing the first eight seconds ofeach track until all of the trackshave been previewed. Press eitherarrow again to stop scanning and toplay the track.

q TUNE r : Turn to go to theprevious or next track.

DISPL (Display): Press to see howlong the current track has beenplaying. ET and the elapsed time ofthe track displays. To change thedefault on the display (track orelapsed time), press until you seethe desired display, then press and

hold for two seconds. The radiobeeps once. The selected display isnow the default.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactiveCD remains inside the radio forfuture listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to playa CD when listening to the radio.The CD symbol displays when a CDis loaded.

Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD.Eject can be activated with eitherthe ignition or radio off. CDs can beloaded with the ignition and radio offif this button is pressed first.

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

MP3/WMA CD-R Disc Format

If you burn your own MP3/WMAdisc on a personal computer:. Make sure the MP3/WMA files

are recorded on a CD-R disc.. Make sure playlists have a .m3u

or .wpl extension, other fileextensions might not work.

. Files can be recorded with avariety of fixed or variable bitrates. Song title, artist name,and album are displayed bythe radio when recorded usingID3 tags version 1 and 2.

. Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songswhile driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for eachalbum. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs or less.

. Make sure to finalize the discwhen burning an MP3/WMAdisc, using multiple sessions.It is usually better to burn thedisc all at once.

The player is able to read andplay a maximum of 253 folders,50 playlists, 20 sessions, and949 files. Long file names, foldernames, or playlist names may usemore disc memory space thannecessary. To conserve space onthe disc, minimize the length ofthe file, folder, or playlist names.



An MP3/WMA CD-R that wasrecorded using no file folders canalso be used. The system cansupport up to 11 folders in depth,though, keep the depth of thefolders to a minimum in order tokeep down the complexity andconfusion in trying to locate aparticular folder during playback.If a CD contains more thanthe maximum of 253 folders,50 playlists, 20 sessions, and949 files, the player lets you accessand navigate up to the maximum,but all items over the maximum areplayed.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. If the root directory hascompressed audio files, thedirectory displays as F1 ROOT. Allfiles contained directly under theroot directory are accessed prior toany root directory folders. However,playlists (Px) are always accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfoldersand no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advancesto the next folder in the file structurethat contains compressed audiofiles. The empty folder does notdisplay.

No Folder

When the CD contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functionshave no function on a CD that wasrecorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of thefolder the radio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but nofolders, all files are located underthe root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons searchplaylists (Px) first and then go to theroot folder. When the radio displaysthe name of the folder, the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of Play

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track

in the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracksin each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.



. If the CD does not contain anyplaylists, then play begins fromthe first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks fromthe root directory have played,play continues from filesaccording to their numericallisting. After playing the lasttrack from the last folder, playbegins again at the first track ofthe first folder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless youhave chosen the folder mode asthe default display. See DISPL(display) later in this section formore information. The new trackname displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists whichwere created by WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited. Theseplaylists are treated as specialfolders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMA

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it in,and READING displays. The CDshould begin playing and the CDsymbol displays. If you want toinsert a CD with the ignition off,first press theZ button or theDISPL knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts toplay where it stopped, if it was thelast selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

1 FLDx (Previous Folder): Pressthis button to go to the first track inthe previous folder. Pressing thisbutton while in folder random modetakes you to the previous folder andplays the tracks in random order inthat folder.

2 FLDw (Next Folder): Press thisbutton to go to the first track in thenext folder. Pressing this buttonwhile in folder random mode takesthe CD to the next folder and playsthe tracks in random order in thatfolder.



3 REV (Reverse): Press and holdthis button to reverse quickly withina track. Press and hold this buttonfor less than 2 seconds to reverse at10 times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than2 seconds to reverse at 20 times thenormal playing speed. Release thisbutton to play the track.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and holdthis button to advance quickly withina track. Press and hold this buttonfor less than 2 seconds to advanceat 10 times the normal playingspeed. Press and hold it for morethan 2 seconds to advance at20 times the normal playing speed.Release this button to play thetrack.

6 RDM (Random): To play thetracks in random order in the currentfolder or playlist, press and releasethis button. FLDRRDM (folderrandom) displays. Once all of thetracks in the current folder or playlisthave played, the system moves tothe next folder or playlist and playsall of the tracks in random order.

To play all the tracks in randomorder on the CD, press and holdthis button for 2 seconds. A beepsounds and DISC RDM (discrandom) displays. This featuredoes not work with playlists.

When in random, pressing andreleasing either SEEK arrow takesthe CD to the previous or to the nextrandom track.

Press and release this button againto turn off random play. NO RDM(no random) displays.

q SEEK r : Press the left SEEKarrow to go to the start of theprevious track. Press the rightSEEK arrow to go to the start of thenext track. Pressing either SEEKarrow for more than 2 secondssearches the previous or next tracksat two tracks per second. Releasethe button to stop searching and toplay the track.

q TUNE r : Turn to reverse oradvance through the tracks inall folders or playlists. The tracknumber and file name displays foreach track. Turning this knob whilein random reverses or advances thetracks in sequential order.

DISPL (Display): Press this knobto switch between track mode,folder/playlist mode, and time ofday mode. The display shows only8 characters, but there can be up to4 pages of text. If there are morethan 8 characters in the song, folder,or playlist name, pressing this knobwithin 2 seconds takes you to thenext page of text. If there are noother pages to be shown, pressingthis knob within 2 seconds takesyou to the next display mode.. Track mode displays the current

track number and the ID3 tagsong name.

. Folder/playlist mode displays thecurrent folder or playlist numberand the folder/playlist name.



. Time of day mode displays thetime of day and the ID3 tagsong name.

To change the default on thedisplay, press the DISPL knobuntil you see the desired display,then press and hold this knob for2 seconds. The radio producesone beep and the selected displayis now the default.

INFO (Information): INFO displayswhen a current track has ID3 taginformation. Press this buttonto display the artist name andalbum contained in the tag. INFOdisappears from the display whenthe information in the ID3 tag hasfinished being read.

BAND: Press this button to listen tothe radio when a CD is playing. Theinactive CD remains inside the radiofor future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press thisbutton to play a CD when listeningto the radio. The CD symbolilluminates on the display when aCD is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this buttonto eject a CD. Eject can activatewhile either the ignition or radio isoff. CDs can be loaded with theignition and radio off if this button ispressed first.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this messagedisplays and/or the CD comes out,it could be for one of the followingreasons:. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. You are driving on a very roughroad. When the road becomessmoother, the CD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. The format of the CD might notbe compatible. See “Using anMP3” later in this section.

. There could have been aproblem while burning the CD.

. The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly,for any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.



Phone

BluetoothVehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Thesystem can be used while the key isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones are guaranteedto work with the Bluetooth system.See www.gm.com/bluetooth formore information on compatiblephones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the g button, located on thedriver side of the instrument panelnear the headlamp controls, tooperate the Bluetooth system.

g (Push To Talk): Press to answerincoming calls, to confirm systeminformation, and to start speechrecognition.

Pairing

A Bluetooth cell phone must bepaired to the Bluetooth system andthen connected to the vehicle beforeit can be used. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling,if available. Refer to the OnStarowner's guide for more information.



Pairing Information. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be

completed once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal IdentificationNumber (PIN).

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN that was provided in Step 3.After the PIN is successfullyentered, the system prompts youto provide a name for the paired

cell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected to thevehicle, see “Listing All Pairedand Connected Phones” later inthis section for more information.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


3. Say “List.”



Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”


3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Dependingon which cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.


3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tagsin the Hands Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The following commands are useddelete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will storea phone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands Free CallingDirectory and the OnStar Turn byTurn Destinations Directory.

Using the “Store” Command

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.



Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands FreeCalling Directory and theOnStarTurn by Turn DestinationsDirectory.

To delete all name tags:

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all thestored numbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”

4. Say “List”.

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial orcall command can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.



Digit Dial: This command allowsa phone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command

1. Press and release g.2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and aring tone is heard in the vehicle.Press and release g to answerthe call.



Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

. Press and release g to answeran incoming call when anothercall is active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press and release g again toreturn to the original call.

. To ignore the incoming call,continue with the original callwith no action.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐Way Calling must besupported on the Bluetooth phoneand enabled by the wireless servicecarrier to work.

1. While on a call press andrelease g.

2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press g to link all the callerstogether.

Ending a Call

To end a call:

1. Press and release g.2. Say “End Call.”

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press g, and thensay “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press g, and thensay “Un‐mute Call.”



Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio From theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press and release g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem From a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press g for more thantwo seconds. The audio transfers tothe vehicle. If the audio does nottransfer to the vehicle, use the audiotransfer feature on the cell phone.See your cell phone manufacturer'suser guide for more information.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice Pass‐Thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.This feature can be used to verballyaccess contacts stored in the cellphone.


3. Say “Voice.”. The cell phone's normal

prompt messages will gothrough its cycle accordingto the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu driven phone system. Accountnumbers can also be stored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press g. The system responds“Ready”, followed by a tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.



Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags inthe phonebook and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theabove sections on Deleting a PairedPhone and Deleting Name Tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13‑19for Federal CommunicationsCommission and Industry Canadainformation.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Temperature Control

B. Fan Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. Recirculation

Temperature Control: Turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature of the air inside thevehicle.

9 (Fan Control): Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.


8-2 Climate Controls

If the knob is set on “0” (zero), someoutside air will still enter the vehicleand will be directed according to theposition of the mode knob.

Air Delivery Mode Control:Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to change thecurrent airflow mode.

Select from the following modes:

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and floor and side windowoutlets. Cooler air is directed to theupper outlets and warmer air to thefloor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets. Recirculation cannotbe selected while in floor modebecause this could cause theinterior window to fog.

/ (Floor/Defog): This modeclears the windows of fog ormoisture. Air is directed to the floor,windshield, and side window outlets.When this mode is selected, thesystem runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outsidetemperature is near freezing orbelow. Recirculation is not availablein this mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode clearsthe windshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.When this mode is selected, thesystem runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outsidetemperature is near, or belowfreezing. Recirculation is notavailable in this mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning systemon or off. An indicator light on thebutton comes on to show that the airconditioning is on.

The fan control must be on to usethe air conditioning.

There might be a slight change inengine performance when the airconditioning compressor shuts offand turns on again. This is normal.The system is designed to makeadjustments to help with fueleconomy while still maintainingthe selected temperature.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.


Climate Controls 8-3

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. Anindicator light on the button comeson to show that the recirculationmode is on. This mode recirculatesand helps to quickly cool the airinside the vehicle. It can be used toprevent outside air and odors fromentering the vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor/defog, defrost,or defogging modes. If recirculationis selected in these modes, theindicator will flash or not come on.

Air VentsUse the thumbwheel on the outletsto change the direction of theair flow.

Lift up or push down on thethumbwheel located in the centerof the outlet to direct the air up ordown, or slide the thumbwheel tothe left or right to direct the airflowfrom side‐to‐side.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow or

leaves from the air inlets at thebase of the windshield that mayblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors may adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.


8-4 Climate Controls

2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-17Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-18Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-21Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-28Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Shifting Out of Park(AutomaticTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Parking (ManualTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-37

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-40

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-50Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . 9-51

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52


9-2 Driving and Operating

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-55Gasoline Specifications (U.S.and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-55Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearyour safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑12.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or ifyou are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.



Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.

Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's systemcan make crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑17.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But that isonly an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three‐fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft). That could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between thevehicle and others is important.



And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the conditionof the road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic. Thisis a mistake. The brakes might nothave time to cool between hardstops. The brakes will wear outmuch faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

Steering

Power Steering

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and theroad surface, the angle at whichthe curve is banked, and vehiclespeed. While in a curve, speedis the one factor that can becontrolled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into thestraightaway.



Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out fromnowhere, or a child darts out frombetween parked cars and stops rightin front of you. These problems canbe avoided by braking— if you canstop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because thereis no room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform verywell in emergencies like these.First apply the brakes. See Brakingon page 9‑3. It is better to removeas much speed as possible froma collision. Then steer aroundthe problem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder isonly slightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that the vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement.



Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm(3 to 5 inches), about one-eighthturn, until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn thesteering wheel to go straight downthe roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid, thewheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your driving tothese conditions. It is important toslow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learn torecognize warning clues— such asenough water, ice, or packed snowon the road to make a mirroredsurface— and slow down when youhave any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.



Off-Road DrivingVehicles with four-wheel drivecan be used for off-road driving.Vehicles without four-wheel driveshould not be driven off-road excepton a level, solid surface.

The airbag system is designed towork properly under a wide range ofconditions, including off‐road usage.Always wear your safety belt andobserve safe driving speeds,especially on rough terrain.

Drinking and driving can be verydangerous on any road and this iscertainly true for off-road driving.At the very time you need specialalertness and driving skills, yourreflexes, perceptions, and judgmentcan be affected by even a smallamount of alcohol. You could have aserious — or even fatal — accidentif you drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking.

Off-roading can be great fun but hassome definite hazards. The greatestof these is the terrain itself. Whenoff-road driving, traffic lanes are notmarked, curves are not banked, andthere are no road signs. Surfacescan be slippery, rough, uphill,or downhill.

Avoid sharp turns and abruptmaneuvers. Failure to operate thevehicle correctly off‐road couldresult in loss of vehicle control orvehicle rollover.

Off-roading involves some newskills. That is why it is veryimportant that you read thesedriving tips and suggestions to helpmake off-road driving safer andmore enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-Roading. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work done.. Make sure there is enough fuel,

that fluid levels are where theyshould be, and that the sparetire is fully inflated.

. Be sure to read all theinformation aboutfour-wheel-drive vehiclesin this manual.

. Make sure all underbodyshields, if the vehicle has them,are properly attached.

. Know the local laws that applyto off-roading where you willbe driving or check with lawenforcement people in the area.

. Be sure to get the necessarypermission if you will be onprivate land.



Loading Your Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ WARNING

. Cargo on the load floor piledhigher than the seatbackscan be thrown forward duringa sudden stop. You or yourpassengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top ofthe seatbacks.

. Unsecured cargo on theload floor can be tossedabout when driving overrough terrain. You or yourpassengers can be struckby flying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof. Keep cargo in thecargo area as far forward andlow as possible.

There are some important things toremember about how to load yourvehicle.. The heaviest things should be

on the floor, forward of the rearaxle. Put heavier items as farforward as you can.

. Be sure the load is properlysecured, so things are nottossed around.

You will find other importantinformation under Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑22 and Tires onpage 10‑50.

Environmental Concerns

Off-road driving can providewholesome and satisfyingrecreation. However, it alsoraises environmental concerns.We recognize these concerns andurge every off-roader to followthese basic rules for protecting theenvironment:. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenspecially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving andobey all posted regulations.

. Avoid any driving practicethat could damage shrubs,flowers, trees, or grasses ordisturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking downtrees, or unnecessary drivingthrough streams or over softground.



. Always carry a litter bag andmake sure all refuse is removedfrom any campsite beforeleaving.

. Take extreme care with openfires (where permitted), campstoves, and lanterns.

. Never park your vehicle overdry grass or other combustiblematerials that could catch firefrom the heat of the vehicle'sexhaust system.

Traveling to Remote Areas

It makes sense to plan your trip,especially when going to a remotearea. Know the terrain and planyour route. Get accurate maps oftrails and terrain. Check to see ifthere are any blocked or closedroads.

It is also a good idea to travel withat least one other vehicle in casesomething happens to one of them.

For vehicles with a winch, be sureto read the winch instructions. In aremote area, a winch can be handyif you get stuck but you will want toknow how to use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-RoadDriving

It is a good idea to practice in anarea that is safe and close to homebefore you go into the wilderness.Off-roading requires some new anddifferent skills.

Tune your senses to different kindsof signals. Your eyes need toconstantly sweep the terrain forunexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire orengine sounds. Use your arms,hands, feet, and body to respond tovibrations and vehicle bounce.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed. At higherspeeds:. You approach things faster and

have less time to react.. There is less time to scan the

terrain for obstacles.. The vehicle has more bounce

when driving over obstacles.. More braking distance is

needed, especially on anunpaved surface.

{ WARNING

When you are driving off-road,bouncing and quick changes indirection can easily throw you outof position. This could cause youto lose control and crash. So,whether you are driving onor off the road, you and yourpassengers should wear safetybelts.



Scanning the Terrain

Off-road driving can take you overmany different kinds of terrain. Befamiliar with the terrain and its manydifferent features.

Surface Conditions: Off-roadingsurfaces can be hard-packed dirt,gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,snow, or ice. Each of these surfacesaffects the vehicle's steering,acceleration, and braking in differentways. Depending on the surface,slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,delayed acceleration, poor traction,and longer braking distances canoccur.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen orhidden obstacles can be hazardous.A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump canstartle you if you are not preparedfor them. Often these obstacles arehidden by grass, bushes, snow,or even the rise and fall of theterrain itself.

Some things to consider:. Is the path ahead clear?. Will the surface texture change

abruptly up ahead?. Does the travel take you uphill or

downhill?. Will you have to stop suddenly

or change direction quickly?

When driving over obstacles orrough terrain, keep a firm grip onthe steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,or other surface features can jerkthe wheel out of your hands.

When driving over bumps, rocks,or other obstacles, the wheels canleave the ground. If this happens,even with one or two wheels, youcannot control the vehicle as well orat all.

Because you will be on an unpavedsurface, it is especially important toavoid sudden acceleration, suddenturns, or sudden braking.

Off-roading requires a different kindof alertness from driving on pavedroads and highways. There are noroad signs, posted speed limits,or signal lights. Use good judgmentabout what is safe and what is not.

Driving on Hills

Off-road driving often takes you up,down, or across a hill. Driving safelyon hills requires good judgmentand an understanding of what thevehicle can and cannot do. Thereare some hills that simply cannot bedriven, no matter how well built thevehicle.



{ WARNING

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. If you drive upthem, you will stall. If you drivedown them, you cannot controlyour speed. If you drive acrossthem, you will roll over. You couldbe seriously injured or killed.If you have any doubt about thesteepness, do not drive the hill.

Approaching a Hill

When you approach a hill, decideif it is too steep to climb, descend,or cross. Steepness can be hardto judge. On a very small hill, forexample, there may be a smooth,constant incline with only a smallchange in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top.On a large hill, the incline may getsteeper as you near the top, but youmight not see this because the crestof the hill is hidden by bushes,grass, or shrubs.

Consider this as you approach a hill:. Is there a constant incline,

or does the hill get sharplysteeper in places?

. Is there good traction on thehillside, or will the surface causetire slipping?

. Is there a straight path up ordown the hill so you will nothave to make turningmaneuvers?

. Are there obstructions on the hillthat can block your path, suchas boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?

. What is beyond the hill? Is therea cliff, an embankment, adrop-off, a fence? Get out andwalk the hill if you do not know.It is the smart way to find out.

. Is the hill simply too rough?Steep hills often have ruts,gullies, troughs, and exposedrocks because they are moresusceptible to the effects oferosion.

Driving Uphill

Once you decide it is safe to driveup the hill:. Use a low gear and get a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Get a smooth start up the hill

and try to maintain speed. Notusing more power than neededcan avoid spinning the wheels orsliding.

{ WARNING

Turning or driving across steephills can be dangerous. You couldlose traction, slide sideways, andpossibly roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. Whendriving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

. Try to drive straight up the hill ifat all possible. If the path twistsand turns, you might want to findanother route.



. Ease up on the speed as youapproach the top of the hill.

. Attach a flag to the vehicle tobe more visible to approachingtraffic on trails or hills.

. Sound the horn as you approachthe top of the hill to let opposingtraffic know you are there.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible to oncoming traffic.

{ WARNING

Driving to the top (crest) of ahill at full speed can cause anaccident. There could be adrop-off, embankment, cliff,or even another vehicle. Youcould be seriously injured orkilled. As you near the top of ahill, slow down and stay alert.

If the vehicle stalls, or is about tostall, and you cannot make it upthe hill:. Push the brake pedal to stop

the vehicle and keep it fromrolling backwards and apply theparking brake.

. If the engine is still running, shiftthe transmission to R (Reverse),release the parking brake, andslowly back down the hill inR (Reverse).

. If the engine has stoppedrunning, you need to restart it.With the brake pedal pressedand the parking brake stillapplied, shift the automatictransmission to P (Park) or themanual transmission to Neutraland restart the engine. Then,shift to R (Reverse), release theparking brake, and slowly backdown the hill as straight aspossible in R (Reverse).

. While backing down the hill, putyour left hand on the steeringwheel at the 12 o'clock positionso you can tell if the wheels arestraight and can maneuver asyou back down. It is best to backdown the hill with the wheelsstraight rather than in the left orright direction. Turning the wheeltoo far to the left or right willincrease the possibility of arollover.

Things not to do if the vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, when going upa hill:. Never attempt to prevent a

stall by shifting into N (Neutral),or pressing the clutch pedal ifthe vehicle has a manualtransmission, to rev-up theengine and regain forwardmomentum. This will not work.The vehicle can roll backwardvery quickly and could go out ofcontrol.



. Never try to turn around if aboutto stall when going up a hill.If the hill is steep enough to stallthe vehicle, it is steep enoughto cause it to roll over. If youcannot make it up the hill, backstraight down the hill.

If, after stalling, you try to backdown the hill and decide you justcannot do it, set the parking brake,shift to P (Park) or 1 (First) with amanual transmission, and turn offthe engine. Leave the vehicle andgo get some help. Exit on the uphillside and stay clear of the paththe vehicle would take if it rolleddownhill. Do not shift the transfercase to Neutral when you leave thevehicle. Leave it in some gear.

{ WARNING

Shifting the transfer case toNeutral can cause your vehicle toroll even if the transmission is inP (Park). This is because theNeutral position on the transfercase overrides the transmission.You or someone else could beinjured. If you are going to leaveyour vehicle, set the parkingbrake and shift the transmissionto P (Park). But do not shift thetransfer case to Neutral.

Driving Downhill

When off-roading takes youdownhill, consider:. How steep is the downhill? Will I

be able to maintain vehiclecontrol?

. What is the surface like?Smooth? Rough? Slippery?Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

. Are there hidden surfaceobstacles? Ruts? Logs?Boulders?

. What is at the bottom of the hill?Is there a hidden creek bank oreven a river bottom with largerocks?



If you decide you can go down ahill safely, try to keep the vehicleheaded straight down. Use a lowgear so engine drag can help thebrakes so they do not have to do allthe work. Descend slowly, keepingthe vehicle under control at alltimes.

{ WARNING

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply thebrakes lightly when descending ahill and use a low gear to keepvehicle speed under control.

Things not to do when driving downa hill:. When driving downhill, avoid

turns that take you across theincline of the hill. A hill that is nottoo steep to drive down might betoo steep to drive across. Thevehicle could roll over.

. Never go downhill with thetransmission in N (Neutral),called free-wheeling. The brakeswill have to do all the work andcould overheat and fade.

Vehicles are much more likely tostall when going uphill, but if ithappens when going downhill:

1. Stop the vehicle by applying theregular brakes and apply theparking brake.

2. Shift to P (Park) and, while stillbraking, restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, releasethe parking brake, and drivestraight down.

4. If the engine will not start, getout and get help.

Driving Across an Incline

An off-road trail will probably goacross the incline of a hill. To decidewhether to try to drive across theincline, consider the following:

{ WARNING

Driving across an incline that istoo steep will make your vehicleroll over. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. If you have anydoubt about the steepness of theincline, do not drive across it.Find another route instead.

. A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steepto drive across. When goingstraight up or down a hill, thelength of the wheel base — thedistance from the front wheels tothe rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumble



end over end. But when drivingacross an incline, the narrowertrack width — the distancebetween the left and rightwheels — might not prevent thevehicle from tilting and rollingover. Driving across an inclineputs more weight on the downhillwheels which could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline evenworse. If you drive across a rockwith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

For these reasons, carefullyconsider whether to try to driveacross an incline. Just because thetrail goes across the incline doesnot mean you have to drive it. Thelast vehicle to try it might haverolled over.

If you feel the vehicle starting toslide sideways, turn downhill. Thisshould help straighten out thevehicle and prevent the sideslipping. The best way to preventthis is to “walk the course” first, soyou know what the surface is likebefore driving it.

Stalling on an Incline

{ WARNING

Getting out on the downhill (low)side of a vehicle stopped acrossan incline is dangerous. If thevehicle rolls over, you could becrushed or killed. Always get outon the uphill (high) side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.

If the vehicle stalls when crossingan incline, be sure you, and anypassengers, get out on the uphillside, even if the door there isharder to open. If you get out onthe downhill side and the vehiclestarts to roll over, you will be right inits path.

If you have to walk down the slope,stay out of the path the vehicle willtake if it does roll over.



Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

When you drive in mud, snow,or sand, the wheels do not getgood traction. Acceleration is not asquick, turning is more difficult, andbraking distances are longer.

It is best to use a low gear when inmud — the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. In really deep mud,keep the vehicle moving so it doesnot get stuck.

When driving on sand, wheeltraction changes. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sanddunes, the tires will tend to sinkinto the sand. This affects steering,accelerating, and braking. Drive ata reduced speed and avoid sharpturns or abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offerthe worst tire traction. On thesesurfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, thetraction is so poor that you will havedifficulty accelerating. And, if thevehicle does get moving, poorsteering and difficult braking cancause it to slide out of control.

{ WARNING

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous.Underwater springs, currentsunder the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehiclecould fall through the ice andyou and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ WARNING

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, andyou could lose traction and rollthe vehicle over. Do not drivethrough rushing water.

Heavy rain can mean flash flooding,and flood waters demand extremecaution.

Find out how deep the water isbefore driving through it. Do nottry it if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe — you probably will not getthrough. Deep water can damagethe axle and other vehicle parts.



If the water is not too deep, driveslowly through it. At faster speeds,water splashes on the ignitionsystem and the vehicle can stall.Stalling can also occur if you get thetailpipe under water. If the tailpipe isunder water, you will never be ableto start the engine. When goingthrough water, remember that whenthe brakes get wet, it might takelonger to stop. See Driving on WetRoads on page 9‑17.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody,chassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

The vehicle requires more frequentservice due to off-road use. Referto the Maintenance Schedule foradditional information.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well ina quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the roadis wet enough and you are goingfast enough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.



There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑50.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.



. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — something couldbe in your lane (stalled car,accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑46 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remainicy when the surrounding roadsare clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑36.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and killyou. You cannot see it or smell it,so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.



To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See “Rocking Your vehicle to get ItOut” later in this section.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑71.

Rocking the Vehicle to getIt Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. For four-wheel drivevehicles, shift into 4HI. Turn off anytraction system. Shift back and forth

between R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission,between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries,it might need to be towed out.Recovery hooks can be used, if thevehicle has them. If the vehicle doesneed to be towed out, see Towingthe Vehicle on page 10‑93.



Recovery Hooks

{ WARNING

These hooks, when used, areunder a lot of force. Always pullthe vehicle straight out. Neverpull on the hooks at a sidewaysangle. The hooks could breakoff and you or others could beinjured from the chain or cablesnapping back.

Notice: Never use recoveryhooks to tow the vehicle. Yourvehicle could be damaged andit would not be covered bywarranty.

For vehicles with recovery hooks atthe front of the vehicle, you can usethem if you are stuck off-road andneed to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.



{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you tolose control and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B‐pillar). With the driverdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door latchpost. Vehicle's without a centerpillar, like extended cab models,will have the Tire and LoadingInformation label attached to thedriver side extended cab door,

above the door latch post. TheTire and Loading Informationlabel shows the number ofoccupant seating positions (A),and the maximum vehiclecapacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10‑50 and Tire Pressureon page 10‑56.

There is also importantinformation on the Certification/Tire label. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.



Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount ofcargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, ifthe “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will befive 150 lb passengers inyour vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing onpage 9‑64 for importantinformation on towing atrailer, towing safety, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

C. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)



Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,cargo, and any accessories orequipment added to your vehicleafter it left the factory shouldnever exceed your vehicle'scapacity weight.



Certification/Tire Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to thebottom section of the driver sidecenter pillar (B-pillar) or on theend of the driver side instrumentpanel. Vehicles without a centerpillar, like extended cab models,will have the Certification/Tirelabel attached to the edge of thedriver side, extended cab door,below the door latch post. Thelabel shows the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). TheGVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel,cargo, and trailer tongue weight,if pulling a trailer.

The Certification/Tire labelalso tells you the maximumweights for the front and rearaxles, called Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on bothsides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, or the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle.

If the load is heavy, it should bespread out.

Similar appearing vehicles mayhave different GVWRs andcapacity weights. Please noteyour vehicle's Certification/Tirelabel or consult your dealer foradditional details.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you tolose control and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.



Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not changeyour weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load yourvehicle the right way.

Notice: Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle— like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving” underOff-Road Driving on page 9‑7.

Remember not to exceedthe Gross Axle Weightrating (GAWR) of the front orrear axle.

Two-Tiered Loading

For vehicles with a six foot bed,an upper load platform can becreated by positioning four 5 cm(2 inches) by 15 cm (6 inches)wooden planks across the widthof the pickup box. The planksmust be inserted in the pickupbox depressions.

When using this upper loadplatform, be sure the load issecurely tied down to prevent itfrom shifting. The load's centerof gravity should be positionedin a zone over the rear axle.



Any load that extends beyondthe vehicle's taillamp area mustbe properly marked according tolocal laws and regulations.

Remember not to exceedthe Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the rear axle.

Add-On Equipment

When you carry removableitems, you may need to put alimit on how many people youcarry inside your vehicle. Besure to weigh your vehiclebefore you buy and install thenew equipment.

Notice: Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

Remember not to exceedthe Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the rear axle.

A reinforcement kit for mountinga toolbox is recommended. Seeyour dealer.

Truck-Camper LoadingInformationThe vehicle was neitherdesigned nor intended tocarry a slide-in type camper.

Notice: Adding a slide-incamper or similar equipmentto the vehicle can damage it,and the repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not install aslide-in camper or similarequipment on the vehicle.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Keep your speed at 88 km/h(55mph) or less for thefirst 805 km (500miles).

. Do not drive at anyone constant speed, fastor slow, for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.



. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles)or so. During this time thenew brake linings are notyet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9‑64 for the trailertowing capabilities ofthe vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply theregular brake pedal.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑33

This position locks the ignition.It also locks the transmission onautomatic transmission vehicles.It locks the steering wheel onmanual transmission vehicles.The key can only be removed inLOCK/OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.



2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to neutral,firmly apply the brakes and steerthe vehicle to a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑47

On vehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein P (Park) to turn the ignition switchto LOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, then the vehicle needsservice.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is theposition in which you can operatethe electrical accessories or itemsplugged into the accessory poweroutlets. On automatic transmissionvehicles, this position unlocks theignition. On manual transmissionvehicles, it unlocks the ignition andsteering wheel . Use this positionif the vehicle must be pushed ortowed.

C (ON/RUN): This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. The switchstays in this position when theengine is running. The transmissionis also unlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart your vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

D (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in theproper gear.

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.



Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be inN (Neutral) and the parking brakeengaged. Hold the clutch pedaldown to the floor and start theengine. The vehicle will not startif the clutch pedal is not all theway down.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assistsin starting the engine andprotects components. If theignition key is turned to theSTART position, and thenreleased when the enginebegins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for afew seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To preventgear damage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switchto ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not startafter 5‐10 seconds, especiallyin very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be floodedwith too much gasoline. Pushthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor a maximum of 15 seconds.Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool.When the engine starts, letgo of the key and accelerator.



If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designedto work with the electronics inthe vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18°C (0°F ). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at leastfour hours before starting.An internal thermostat in theplug-end of the cord may existwhich will prevent engine coolantheater operation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrapthe electrical cord. The cordis located in the enginecompartment behind theunderhood fuse block on thedriver side of the vehicle.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord to prevent damage.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.



Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 20 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Wipers. Power Windows

These features work when thekey is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,power to these features continue towork for up to 20 minutes or until adoor is opened.

Shifting Into Park(Automatic Transmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑59.

1. Hold the brake pedal downwith your right foot and set theparking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9‑47for more information.

{ WARNING

If you have four-wheel drive, thevehicle will be free to roll— evenif the shift lever is in P (Park)— ifthe transfer case is in Neutral.So, be sure the transfer caseis in a drive gear, two-wheelhigh (2H) or four-wheel high (4H)or four-wheel low (4L)— not inNeutral.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by pulling the lever toward youand moving it up as far as itwill go.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the key, the vehicle is inP (Park).



Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running (AutomaticTransmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into P (Park), holdthe regular brake pedal down.

Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) withoutfirst pulling it toward you. If you can,the shift lever was not fully lockedinto P (Park).

Torque Lock (AutomaticTransmission)

If you are parking on a hill andyou do not shift the transmissioninto P (Park) properly, the weightof the vehicle may put too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see “ShiftingInto Park (Automatic Transmission)”in this section.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pullthe shift lever out of P (Park).

Shifting Out of Park(Automatic Transmission)The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You have to fully apply thebrake pedal before you can shiftfrom P (Park) when the ignitionis ON/RUN. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑37.

The shift lock control system isdesigned to do the following:. Prevent the ignition key from

being removed unless the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.



The shift lock control system isalways functional except in the caseof a dead battery or low voltage(less than 9 V) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑90 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park) use thefollowing:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, push the shift lever all theway into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced.

Parking (ManualTransmission)If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, before you get outof the vehicle, move the shift leverinto R (Reverse), and firmly applythe parking brake. Once theshift lever has been placed intoR (Reverse) with the clutch pedalpressed in, turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF, remove the key andrelease the clutch.

If you are parking on a hill, or ifthe vehicle is pulling a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑59.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.



Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑36.



{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenit is on fairly level ground, alwaysset the parking brake and movethe automatic transmission shiftlever to P (Park), or the manualtransmission shift lever to Neutral.

{ WARNING

Four-wheel drive vehicles with thetransfer case in N (Neutral) willallow the vehicle to roll, even ifthe automatic transmission shiftlever is in P (Park). So, be surethe transfer case is in a drivegear — not in N (Neutral). Alwaysset the parking brake.

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 9‑33.

If pulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑59.

AutomaticTransmission

The vehicle has a shift lever on thesteering column.

It features an electronic shiftposition indicator within theinstrument cluster. This displayis powered anytime the shiftlever is capable of being movedout of P (Park). This means thatif the ignition is turned off, butnot in LOCK/OFF, there willbe a small current drain on thebattery which could dischargethe battery over a period of time.



If you need to leave the key in theignition but not in LOCK/OFF for anextended period, it is recommendedthat you disconnect the batterycable from the battery to preventdischarging the battery.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best positionto use when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unlessyou have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

could be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 9‑33.If you are pulling a trailer, seeDriving Characteristics andTowing Tips on page 9‑59.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply thebrake pedal before you can shiftfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever by pushing the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenmove the shift lever into another

gear. See Shifting Out of Park(Automatic Transmission) onpage 9‑34.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forthto get out of snow, ice, or sandwithout damaging the transmission,see If the Vehicle is Stuck onpage 9‑21.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is are already moving,use N (Neutral) only.



{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

The transmission will shift downto the next gear and the vehiclewill have more power.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding, see “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑6.

3 (Third): This position is alsoused for normal driving. However, itreduces vehicle speed more thanD (Drive) without using the brakes.You might choose 3 (Third) insteadof D (Drive) when driving on hilly,winding roads, or when towing atrailer, so there is less shiftingbetween gears and when goingdown a steep hill.

2 (Second): This position reducesvehicle speed even more than3 (Third) without using the brakes.You can use 2 (Second) to helpcontrol vehicle speed on steepmountain roads, but then you wouldalso want to use the brakes offand on.



1 (First): This position reducesvehicle speed even morethan 2 (Second) without usingthe brakes. You can use it on verysteep hills, or in deep snow or mud.If the shift lever is put in 1 (First)while the vehicle is moving forward,the transmission will not shift intofirst gear until the vehicle is goingslowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tiresor holding the vehicle inone place on a hill using onlythe accelerator pedal maydamage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.

Manual Transmission

This is your shift pattern.

Here is how to operate the manualtransmission:

1 (First): Press the clutch pedaland shift into 1 (First). Then,slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you slowly press down on theaccelerator pedal.

You can shift into 1 (First) whenyou are going less than 30 km/h(20 mph). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shiftinto 1 (First), put the shift lever inNeutral and let up on the clutch.Then press the clutch pedal backdown and shift into 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalas you let up on the acceleratorpedal and shift into 2 (Second).Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth):Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth)and 5 (Fifth) the same way youdo for 2 (Second). Slowly let up onthe clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and thebrake pedal, and shift to Neutral.



Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine.

R (Reverse): To back up, press theclutch pedal. After the vehicle stops,shift into R (Reverse). Slowly let upon the clutch pedal as you pressthe accelerator pedal. If it is hardto shift, let the shift lever return toNeutral and release the clutchpedal. Then press the clutch againand shift into R (Reverse). Do notattempt to shift into 5 (Fifth) priorto shifting into R (Reverse). Thetransmission has a lock out featurewhich prevents a 5 (Fifth) gearto R (Reverse) gear shift.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

Use R (Reverse), along with theparking brake, for parking thevehicle.

Up-Shift Light

This light will show you when to shiftto the next higher gear for best fueleconomy.

When this light comes on, youcan shift to the next higher gear ifweather, road and traffic conditionspermit. For the best fuel economy,accelerate slowly and shift when thelight comes on.

While you accelerate, it is normalfor the light to go on and off if youquickly change the position of theaccelerator. Ignore the shift lightwhen you downshift.

If the vehicle has four-wheel driveand has a manual transmission,disregard the shift light when thetransfer case is in four-wheel low.

Shift Speeds

{ WARNING

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could lose controlof the vehicle. You could injureyourself or others. Do not shiftdown more than one gear at atime when you downshift.



Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has four-wheeldrive, you can send the engine'sdriving power to all four wheelsfor extra traction. To get the bestperformance out of four-wheeldrive, you must be familiar with itsoperation. Read this section beforeusing four-wheel drive. You shoulduse two-wheel drive high for mostnormal driving conditions.

Notice: Driving on clean, drypavement in four-wheel drive foran extended period of time cancause premature wear on thevehicle's powertrain. Do notdrive on clean, dry pavement inFour-Wheel Drive for extendedperiods of time.

Notice: If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the differentsize spare tire is installed on thevehicle, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until you can have your flattire repaired and/or replaced. Youcould damage the vehicle, andthe repair costs would not becovered by your warranty. Neveruse four-wheel drive when thedifferent size spare tire isinstalled on the vehicle.

Notice: If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the compactspare tire is installed on thevehicle, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until you can have the flattire repaired and/or replaced. Youcould damage the vehicle, andthe repair costs would not becovered by your warranty. Neveruse four-wheel drive when thecompact spare tire is installed onthe vehicle.

The transfer case buttons arelocated to the right of the steeringwheel on the instrument panel.



Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Driving ConditionsTransfer Case Settings

2 m 4 m 4 n N

Normal YES

Severe YES

Extreme YES

Vehicle in Tow* YES

*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 10‑94 or Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑93 for further information.

Shifting into Four‐Wheel Lowwill turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak® off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 9‑48and StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑50 for more information.

Use these buttons to shift into andout of four-wheel drive. You canchoose from the following:

2m (Two-Wheel High): This settingis for driving in most street andhighway situations. The front axle isnot engaged in two-wheel drive.

{ WARNING

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake onpage 9‑47.

N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle'stransfer case to N (Neutral) onlywhen towing the vehicle.

4m (Four-Wheel High): This settingengages the front axle to help drivethe vehicle. Use four-wheel highwhen you need extra traction, suchas on snowy or icy roads, or in mostoff-road situations.



4n (Four-Wheel Low): This settingalso engages the front axle to giveyou extra traction. It sends themaximum power to all four wheels.You might choose four-wheel low ifyou were driving off-road in sand,mud, or deep snow and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

Shifting into Four‐Wheel Lowwill turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak® off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 9‑48and StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑50 for more information.

Indicator lights in the buttons showyou which setting you are in. Theindicator lights will come on brieflywhen you turn on the ignition andone will stay on the selected setting.If the lights do not come on, youshould take the vehicle in forservice. An indicator light will flashwhile shifting. It will stay on whenthe shift is completed.

If the transfer case does not shift, itwill return to the last chosen setting.

Shifting from Two-Wheel High toFour-Wheel High

Press and release the Four-WheelHigh button. This can be done atany speed, and the front axle willlock automatically.

Shifting from Four-Wheel High toTwo-Wheel High

Press and release the Two-WheelHigh button. This can be done atany speed, and the front axle willunlock automatically.

It is normal to hear and feel thevehicle's transfer case shift intoFour-Wheel High. If you shift withthe vehicle stopped, the indicatorlight may still flash slowly. It may benecessary to shift the transmissionmomentarily into R (Reverse)and D (Drive), for an automatictransmission, or R (Reverse)and 1 (First) for a manualtransmission to have the lightstop flashing.

Shifting from Two-Wheel Highor Four-Wheel High toFour-Wheel Low

To shift from Two-Wheel High orFour-Wheel High to Four-WheelLow, the vehicle must be stoppedor moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission in N (Neutral)for an automatic transmission or theclutch pedal pressed for a manualtransmission. The preferred methodfor shifting into Four-Wheel Lowis to have your vehicle moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

Press and release the Four-WheelLow button. You must wait for theFour-Wheel Low indicator light tostop flashing and stay on beforeshifting the transmission into gear orreleasing the clutch pedal.

If the Four-Wheel Low button ispressed when the vehicle is in gearand/or moving faster than 5 km/h(3 mph), the Four-Wheel Lowindicator light will flash for30 seconds and not complete theshift.



Shifting from Four-Wheel Lowto Two-Wheel High orFour-Wheel High

To shift from Four-Wheel Low toTwo-Wheel High or Four-WheelHigh, the vehicle must be stoppedor moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)with the transmission in N (Neutral)for an automatic transmission or theclutch pedal pressed for a manualtransmission. The preferred methodfor shifting out of Four-Wheel Lowis to have your vehicle moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph).

Press and release the Four-WheelHigh or Two-Wheel High button. Youmust wait for the Four-Wheel Highor Two-Wheel High indicator lightto stop flashing and stay on beforeshifting the transmission into gear orreleasing the clutch pedal.

If the Four-Wheel High orTwo-Wheel High button ispressed when the vehicle is ingear and/or moving faster than5 km/h (3 mph), the Four-WheelHigh or Two-Wheel High indicatorlight will flash for 30 seconds but notcomplete the shift.

Shifting to Neutral

Use N (Neutral) when you plan totow the vehicle. See RecreationalVehicle Towing on page 10‑94 fortowing instructions. To shift thetransfer case into N (Neutral) do thefollowing:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Start the vehicle.

3. Press the regular brake pedaland shift the transmission inN (Neutral), or press in theclutch for vehicles with amanual transmission.

4. Shift the transfer case toTwo-Wheel High.

5. Press and hold the Two-WheelHigh and Four-Wheel Lowbuttons at the same time for10 seconds. The N (Neutral) lightwill come on when the transfercase shift to N (Neutral) iscomplete.

6. Press and hold the regular brakepedal and shift the transmissionto R (Reverse) for one second,then shift the transmission toD (Drive) for one second,or 1 (First) for vehicles withmanual transmissions, and letout the clutch to insure thetransfer case is in N (Neutral).If the transfer case is notin N (Neutral), repeat thisprocedure starting at Step 3.

7. Turn the engine off by turningthe key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

8. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park), or 1 (First) forvehicles that have a manualtransmission.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.



Shifting Out of Neutral

After towing the vehicle, you willhave to shift out of N (Neutral) inorder to drive. To shift out ofN (Neutral), do the following:

1. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal.

2. Start a vehicle with an automatictransmission in P (Park).Use 1 (First) for vehicles with amanual transmission.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral), or press the clutchpedal for vehicles with a manualtransmission.

4. Press the button for the desiredtransfer case shift position(Two-Wheel High, Four-WheelHigh, or Four-Wheel Low).

5. After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theindicator light will go out.

6. Release the parking brake.

7. Shift the transmission to thedesired position.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑17.

If driving safely on a wet road andit becomes necessary to slam onthe brakes and continue brakingto avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.



Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

The parking brake pedal is locatedto the left of the brake pedal, nearthe driver door.

To set the parking brake, hold thebrake pedal down, then push theparking brake pedal down to itsfully-applied position.

A chime will activate and thebrake warning light, located on theinstrument panel, will flash when theparking brake is applied and thevehicle is moving at least 5 km/h(3 mph) for at least three seconds.

The chime will deactivate and thelight will turn off when the parkingbrake is set and the vehicle ismoving below 5 km/h (3 mph). SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 5‑17.

To release the parking brake,hold the regular brake pedal down.Pull the bottom edge of the lever,located above the parking brakepedal, with the parking brakesymbol, directly rearward to releasethe parking brake.



If the ignition is on when the parkingbrake is released, the brake systemwarning light will go off.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on any hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑59.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplementthe power brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this timeis normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The Traction Control System (TCS)is part of StabiliTrak. TCS limitswheel slip which is especially usefulin slippery road conditions. Thesystem operates only if it sensesthat any of the wheels are spinningor beginning to lose traction. Whenthis happens, TCS applies thebrakes to limit wheel spin and alsoreduces engine power. The systemmay be heard or felt while it isworking. This is normal and doesnot mean there is a problem withthe vehicle.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleis allowed to spin excessivelywhile the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brakewarning lights, and any relevantDIC messages are displayed, thetransfer case could be damaged.



The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Reduceengine power and do not spinthe wheel(s) excessively whilethese lights and messages aredisplayed.

TCS can operate on dry roadsunder some conditions. Whenthis happens, the system may beheard working or a reduction inacceleration may be noticed. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.Examples of these conditionsinclude hard acceleration in a turn,an abrupt upshift or downshift of thetransmission or driving on roughroads.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control automaticallydisengages. The cruise controlcan be re-engaged when roadconditions allow. See Cruise Controlon page 9‑52.

The message TRACTION FAULTappears in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when a TCS orAntilock Brake System (ABS)problem has been detected and thevehicle needs service. When thismessage is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑27.

The StabiliTrak/TCS light will flashon the instrument panel clusterwhen the TCS system or StabiliTrakis both on and activated.

The StabiliTrak/TCS button islocated on the instrument panel.

To turn off TCS, press and releasethe StabiliTrak/TCS button. TheStabiliTrak/TCS light comes on inthe instrument panel cluster, andTRAC OFF comes on the DIC.To turn TCS back on, press andrelease the StabiliTrak/TCS button.

Adding non-dealer/non-retaileraccessories can affect the vehicle'sperformance. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.



StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has an electronicstability control system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists the driver with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to assist thedriver with keeping the vehicle onthe intended path.

When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto insure there are no problems.The system may be heard orfelt while it is working. This isnormal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

The system should initialize beforethe vehicle reaches 32 km/h(20 mph). In some cases, it maytake approximately two miles ofdriving before the system initializes.

If cruise control is being usedwhen StabiliTrak activates, thecruise control automaticallydisengages. The cruise controlcan be re-engaged when roadconditions allow. See Cruise Controlon page 9‑52.

If there is a problem detected withStabiliTrak, a SERVICE STAB SYSmessage displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑27 for more information.When this message is displayed,the system is not working. Adjustyour driving accordingly.

StabiliTrak and Traction Control(TCS) come on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is startedand the systems are reset with

each ignition cycle. However,when the transfer case is placedin Four-Wheel-Low mode,StabiliTrak is automaticallydisabled. See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 10‑31 for more information.It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the TCS portion of thesystem off if the vehicle is stuck insand, mud, ice, or snow, and it isnecessary to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. If traction controlis turned off, only the brake-tractioncontrol portion of traction controlwill work. The engine speedmanagement will be disabled.In this mode, engine power isnot reduced automatically and thedrive wheels can spin more freely.This can cause the brake-tractioncontrol to activate constantly. See Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑21.



The StabiliTrak/TCS light will flashon the instrument panel clusterwhen the TCS system or StabiliTrakis both on and activated.

The StabiliTrak/TCS buttonis located on the instrumentpanel.

To turn off TCS, press and releasethe StabiliTrak/TCS button. TheStabiliTrak/TCS light comes on inthe instrument panel cluster, andTRAC OFF comes on the DIC.To turn TCS back on, press andrelease the StabiliTrak/TCS button.

To turn off TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the StabiliTrak/TCSbutton until the TRAC OFF andSTAB SYS OFF messages comeon the DIC and the StabiliTrak/TCSlight comes on the instrumentpanel. To turn TCS and StabiliTrakback on, press and release theStabiliTrak/TCS button.

When the TCS or StabiliTrak systemis turned off, the StabiliTrak/TCSlight and the appropriate TRAC OFFor STAB SYS OFF message will be

displayed on the DIC. The vehiclewill still have brake-traction controlwhen TCS or StabiliTrak is off, butwill not be able to use the enginespeed management system. TheStabiliTrak/TCS light flashes wheneither system is actively working.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑48 for more information.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleVehicles with a limited-slip rear axlecan give more traction on snow,mud, ice, sand or gravel. It workslike a standard axle most of thetime, but when traction is low, thisfeature allows the drive wheel withthe most traction to move thevehicle.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol shuts off.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

If the vehicle's StabiliTrak® /TractionControl System (TCS) begins tolimit wheel spin while the cruisecontrol is on, the cruise controlautomatically disengages. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑50 orTraction Control System (TCS) onpage 9‑48. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again,the cruise control can be turnedback on.

These controls are located at theend of the multifunction lever.

9 (Off): Turns the system off.

R (On): Turns the system on.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Use tomake the vehicle accelerate orresume a previously set speed.

rT (Set): Press the buttonat the end of the lever to set thespeed.



Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

1. Move the cruise controllever to R.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press r T at the end of thelever and release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

This light on the instrument panelcluster comes on while the cruisecontrol is on.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,move the cruise control lever brieflyfrom R to S . The vehicle returns tothe previous set speed and staysthere.

If the lever is held at resume/accelerate the vehicle keeps goingfaster until the lever is released orthe brake is applied. Do not hold thelever at resume/accelerate, unlessyou want the vehicle to go faster.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Use the accelerator pedal

to get to the higher speed.Press rT at the end of thelever, then release the buttonand the accelerator pedal. If theaccelerator pedal is held longerthan 60 seconds, cruise controlwill turn off.

. Move the cruise leverfrom R to S . Hold it until thedesired speed is reached, andthen release the lever.

. To increase the vehicle speed insmall amounts, move the leverbriefly to S .



Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,

. Press and hold rT until thelower speed desired is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,briefly press rT .

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise controlworks on hills depends uponthe vehicle speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When goingup steep hills, you might have tostep on the accelerator pedalto maintain the vehicle speed.

When going downhill, you mighthave to brake or shift to a lowergear to keep the vehicle speeddown. When the brakes are appliedthe cruise control is disengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are two ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control;

step lightly on the brake pedal orlightly tap or press the clutch, formanual transmissions.

. To turn off the cruise control,move the cruise controllever to9 .

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by moving thecruise control lever to9 or if theignition is turned off.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.



Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. If heavy knocking isheard when using gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States orCAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 inCanada. Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑56 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emission

control system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑14. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, askan auto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.



Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to thefuel. However, some gasolinescontain only the minimum amountof additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves clean,or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline. Look for the TOP TIERlabel on the fuel pump to ensuregasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developedby the auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be foundat www.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not useTOP TIER Detergent Gasolineregularly, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help clean depositsfrom fuel injectors and intakevalves. GM Fuel System TreatmentPLUS is the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines mightbe available in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emission controlsystem could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you ifyou open the fuel cap tooquickly. If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you couldbe badly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and waita few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible.See “Washing the Vehicle” inExterior Care.



When replacing the fuel cap, turnit clockwise until it clicks. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. If the fuel cap isnot properly installed, the FUELCAP message appears on theDriver Information Center (DIC)and the check engine light will belit on the instrument panel cluster.See Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑27 and Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑14 for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer.The wrong type fuel cap mightnot fit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑14.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burned

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.



Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment thathas been designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving

while towing a trailer, see“Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipmentto tow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑93. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑94.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Pulling A Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many different laws,

including speed limit restrictions,having to do with trailering.Make sure the rig will be legal,not only where you live butalso where you will be driving.A good source for thisinformation can be state orprovincial police.

. Consider using a sway control.See “Hitches” in TowingEquipment on page 9‑69.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 miles) thenew vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of thevehicle wear in at the heavierloads.

. Vehicles with automatictransmissions can tow inD (Drive), but you may want toshift to a lower gear selection ifthe transmission shifts too often(e.g., under heavy loads and/orhilly conditions). If the vehiclehas a manual transmissionit is better not to use thehighest gear.



Three important considerationshave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The weight on the vehicle's tires

Driving with a Trailer

{ WARNING

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rearof the vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

To maximize safety when towinga trailer:

. Have the exhaust systeminspected for leaks and makenecessary repairs beforestarting a trip.

. Never drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑36.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Get to knowthe rig before setting out for theopen road. Get acquainted with thefeel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. Andalways keep in mind that the vehicleyou are driving is now longer andnot as responsive as the vehicle isby itself.

Before starting, check all trailerhitch parts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires and mirror adjustments. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start thevehicle and trailer moving and thenapply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This checks the electricalconnection at the same time.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secure,and that the lamps and any trailerbrakes are still working.



While towing a trailer or whenexposed to long periods ofsunshine, the floor of the truck bedmay become very warm. Avoidputting items in the truck bed thatmight be affected by high ambienttemperatures.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gomuch farther beyond the passedvehicle before returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, tomove the trailer to the left, movethat hand to the left. To move thetrailer to the right, move your handto the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do thisso the trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. For this reason youmay think other drivers are seeingthe signal when they are not. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.



Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

Vehicles with automatictransmissions can tow in D (Drive),but you may want to shift to a lowergear selection if the transmissionshifts too often (e.g., under heavyloads and/or hilly conditions). If thevehicle has a manual transmission itis better not to use the highest gear.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with anautomatic transmission in P (Park)or a manual transmission inN (Neutral) with the parking brakeapplied, for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10‑24.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hillwith the trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet forvehicles with an automatictransmission, or into gearfor vehicles with a manualtransmission. Turn the wheelsinto the curb if facing downhillor into traffic if facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.



3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park) for vehicles with anautomatic transmission or intogear for vehicles with a manualtransmission.

5. If the vehicle hasfour-wheel-drive, be surethe transfer case is in a drivegear and not in N (Neutral).See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 10‑31 for more information.

6. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine. Shift into a gear. Release the parking brake

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 or the Index for moreinformation. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil,axle lubricant, belts, coolingsystem and brake system. It is agood idea to inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.



Trailer Towing

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer istoo heavy, the brakes may notwork well— or even at all. Thedriver and passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” that appearslater in this section.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that of

your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature andhow much the vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight iscalculated assuming only the driveris in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.



Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

2WD Regular Cab

2.9L L4 Automatic Transmission 3.73 1 542 kg (3,400 lbs) 3 175 kg (7,000 lbs)

2.9L L4 Manual Transmission 3.73 1 089 kg (2,400 lbs) 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs)


2WD Extended Cab


2.9L L4 Manual Transmission 3.73 998 kg (2,200 lbs) 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs)


5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission3.423.73

2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs)

5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission,ZQ8 Sport Suspension 3.42 1 814 kg (4,000 lbs) 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs)




2WD Crew Cab





2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs)

5.3L V8 Automatic Transmission,ZQ8 Sport Suspension

3.42 1 724 kg (3,800 lbs) 3 856 kg (8,500 lbs)

4WD Regular Cab




4WD Extended Cab





2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs)




4WD Crew Cab



2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 717 kg (10,400 lbs)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includesthe curb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.

If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑22for more information about thevehicle's maximum load capacity.



The trailer tongue weight (A) shouldbe 10 percent to 15 percent of thetotal loaded trailer weight, up to amaximum of 226 kg (500 lbs) with aweight carrying hitch.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit forcold tires. These numbers can befound on the Certification/Tire labellocated at the bottom of the centerpillar on the driver's side of thevehicle, or see Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑22. Make sure not to goover the GVW limit for the vehicle,or the GAWR, including the weightof the trailer tongue. If using aweight distributing hitch, makesure not to go over the rear axlelimit before applying the weightdistribution spring bars.



Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch isneeded.

Weight-Distributing Hitchesand Weight Carrying Hitches

A step bumper hitch can be used fortrailers up to 907 kg (2,000 lbs) totalweight, and 90 kg (200 lbs) tongueweight.

Notice: If a step-bumper hitchis used, the bumper could bedamaged in sharp turns. Makesure there is ample room whenturning to avoid contact betweenthe trailer and the bumper.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongueof the trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. For trailers up to907 kg (2,000 lbs) safety chainsmay be attached to the attachingpoints on the bumper. For heaviertrailers, follow the trailer or hitchmanufacturer's recommendation forattaching safety chains. Alwaysleave just enough slack so the rigcan turn. Never allow safety chainsto drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Since the vehicle is equipped withStabiliTrak®, the trailer cannot tapinto the vehicle's hydraulic brakesystem.



Trailer Wiring Harness

The vehicle may be equipped witha four‐pin trailer towing harness.This harness has a four‐pin trailerconnector that is attached to abracket on the hitch platform. Thefour‐wire harness contains thefollowing trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal. Brown: Taillamps/Park lamps. White: Ground

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑39 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑40.

Pickup Conversion toChassis CabWe are aware that some vehicleowners might consider havingthe pickup box removed and acommercial or recreational bodyinstalled. However, we recommendthat conversions of this type not bedone to pickups. Owners should beaware that, as manufactured, thereare differences between a chassiscab and a pickup with the boxremoved which could affect vehiclesafety.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-19Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-24Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-26Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-33Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-35

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Front Turn Signal, Parking,and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-40

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-41Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-50Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58


10-2 Vehicle Care

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-70Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Secondary Latch System . . . 10-85Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-88Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-89

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-93Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106

General InformationFor service and parts needs,visit your dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition 65WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessoriesto the vehicle can affect vehicleperformance and safety, includingsuch things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non‐GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, is notcovered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealerand ask for GM Accessories, youwill know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GMAccessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑40.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English andmetric fasteners can beeasily confused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑15.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑39.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑10.


Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is located inside thevehicle on the lower left side ofthe instrument panel.

2. Release the secondary latch onthe hood. It is located below thefront center of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Release the hood prop from itsretainer and put the hood propinto the slot in the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenlift the hood to relieve pressure onthe hood prop. Remove the hoodprop from the slot in the hood andreturn the prop to its retainer. Lowerthe hood 25 to 30 cm (10 to 12 in)above the vehicle and release it tolatch fully. Check to make sure thehood is closed and repeat theprocedure if necessary.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

3.7 L L5 Engine Shown (2.9 L L4 Engine Similar)


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Windshield Washer Fluid. See“Adding Washer Fluid” underWasher Fluid on page 10‑27.

B. Engine Coolant RecoveryTank. See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑21.

C. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑19.

D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir(low in engine compartment).See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑26.

E. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick (If Equipped). See“Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑15.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑10.

G. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10‑20.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal(GND). See Jump Starting onpage 10‑90.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑10.

J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑90.

K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid on page 10‑29.

L. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑43.

M. Battery on page 10‑31.

N. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir(If Equipped). See HydraulicClutch on page 10‑18.


10-8 Vehicle Care

5.3 L V8 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑19.

B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator(If Equipped). See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑19.

C. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑27.

D. Engine Coolant RecoveryTank. See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑21.

E. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick (If Equipped). See“Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑15.

F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑10.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑10.

H. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid on page 10‑29.

I. Battery on page 10‑31.

J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑26.

K. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑43.

L. Radiator Pressure Cap. SeeCooling System on page 10‑20.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engineoil. Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil.”

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil.”

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑14.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do WithUsed Oil.”

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking your oil level too soonafter engine shut off will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.


Vehicle Care 10-11

When to Add Engine Oil

L4 and L5 Engines

V8 Engine

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, addone liter/quart of the recommendedoil and then recheck the level.

See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”for an explanation of what kind of oilto use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find thatyou have an oil level above theoperating range, i.e. the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the proper

operating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit yourdriving of the vehicle and seek aservice professional to removethe excess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade:

Specification

Use and ask for engine oils withthe dexos™ certification mark. Oilsmeeting the requirements of yourvehicle should have the dexos™certification mark on the container.This certification mark indicates thatthe oil has been approved to thedexos™ specification.

Your vehicle was filled at the factorywith dexos™ approved engine oil.

Notice: Use only engine oil thatis approved to the dexos™specification or an equivalentengine oil of the appropriateviscosity grade. Engine oilsapproved to the dexos™specification will show thedexos™ symbol on the container.Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. If youare unsure whether your oil isapproved to the dexos™specification, ask your serviceprovider.

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos™ is unavailable: In the eventthat dexos™ approved engine oil isnot available at an oil change or formaintaining proper oil level, youmay use substitute engine oildisplaying the API Starburst symboland of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.Use of oils that do not meet thedexos™ specification, however, mayresult in reduced performance undercertain circumstances.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do notuse other viscosity oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C

(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, be sure to always selectan oil that meets the requiredspecification, dexos™. See“Specification” for more information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils with thedexos™ specification and displayingthe dexos™ certification markare all that is needed for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.


10-14 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE OILmessage comes on. See Engine OilMessages on page 5‑26. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 1 000 km (600miles).

It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedpeople who will perform this workand reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 miles)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press and release the stemin the lower center of theinstrument cluster until theOIL LIFE message is displayed.

3. Once the alternating OIL LIFEand RESET messages appear,press and hold the stem untilseveral beeps sound. Thisconfirms that the oil life systemhas been reset.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

If the CHANGE OIL messagecomes back on when the vehicle isstarted, the engine oil life systemhas not been reset. Repeat theprocedure.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

A good time to check the automatictransmission fluid level is when theengine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2, and besure to use the transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Because this operation can be alittle difficult, it may be decided tohave this done at the dealer servicedepartment.

If not taken to the dealer, be sure tofollow all the instructions here, or afalse reading on the dipstick couldresult.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmissionto overheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes beforechecking the transmission fluid levelif the vehicle has been driven:. When outside temperatures are

above 32°C (90°F).. At high speed for quite a while.. In heavy traffic— especially in

hot weather.. While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluidshould be at normal operatingtemperature, which is 82°C to 93°C(180°F to 200°F).

Get the vehicle warmed up bydriving about 24 km (15 mi) whenoutside temperatures are above10°C (50°F). If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third)until the engine temperature gaugemoves and then remains steady for10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be madeafter the vehicle has been sittingfor eight hours or more with theengine off, but this is used onlyas a reference. Let the engine runat idle for five minutes if outsidetemperatures are 10°C (50°F) ormore. If it is colder than 10°C(50°F), the engine may have toidle longer. Should the fluid level below during this cold check, checkthe fluid hot before adding fluid.Checking the fluid hot gives a moreaccurate reading of the fluid level.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Checking the Fluid Level

To prepare the vehicle:

1. Park the vehicle on a levelplace. Keep the engine running.

2. With the parking brake applied,place the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With foot on the brake pedal,move the shift lever througheach gear range, pausing forabout three seconds in eachrange. Then, position the shiftlever in P (Park).

4. Let the engine run at idle forthree minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off theengine:

1. Flip the handle up and thenpull out the dipstick andwipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

The automatic transmissiondipstick handle with this symbolon it is located in the enginecompartment on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation on location.

2. Push it back in all the way, waitthree seconds, and pull it backout again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick,and read the lower level. Thefluid level must be in the COLD

area, below the cross-hatchedarea, for a cold check or in theHOT or cross-hatched area for ahot check. Be sure to keep thedipstick pointed down to get anaccurate reading.

4. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

How to Add AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine what kindof transmission fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

Add fluid only after checking thetransmission fluid while it is hot.A cold check is used only as areference. If the fluid level is low,add only enough of the properfluid to bring the level up tothe HOT area for a hot check.


Vehicle Care 10-17

It does not take much fluid,generally less than 0.5 L (1 pt).Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluidmay damage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑6.. After adding fluid, recheck the

fluid level as described under“How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier inthis section.

. When the correct fluid level isobtained, push the dipstickback in all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstickin place.

Manual TransmissionFluid

When to Check

A good time to check the manualtransmission fluid is when theengine oil is changed. However, thefluid in the manual transmissiondoes not require changing.

How to Check

Because this operation can be alittle difficult, it may be decided tohave this done at the dealer servicedepartment.

If not taken to the dealer, be sure tofollow all the instructions here, or afalse reading on the dipstick couldresult.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Too little fluidcould cause the transmissionto overheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Check the fluid level only whenthe engine is off, the vehicle isparked on a level place and thetransmission is cool enough totouch the transmission case.

After this is done:

1. Remove the fill plug.

2. Check that the lubricant levelis up to the bottom of the fillplug hole.


10-18 Vehicle Care

3. If the fluid level is good, installthe plug and be sure it is fullyseated. If the fluid level is low,add more fluid as described inthe next steps.

How to Add Fluid

Here is how to add fluid. Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule todetermine what kind of fluid to use.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

1. Remove the fill plug.

2. Add fluid at the fill plug hole.Add only enough fluid to bringthe fluid level up to the bottom ofthe fill plug hole.

3. Install the fill plug. Be sure theplug is fully seated.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in thevehicle is self-adjusting. The clutchmaster cylinder reservoir is filledwith hydraulic clutch fluid.

The hydraulic clutch fluid reservoircap has this symbol on it. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

It is not necessary to regularlycheck clutch fluid unless a leak inthe system is suspected. Addingfluid will not correct a leak.

A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to checkthe fluid level in the clutch mastercylinder reservoir and for the properfluid. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

How to Check and Add Fluid

The proper fluid should be added ifthe level does not reach the bottomof the diaphragm when it is in placein the reservoir. See the instructionson the reservoir cap.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter islocated in the engine compartmenton the passenger side of thevehicle. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation on location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 formore information. If you aredriving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter, do the following:

1. Unfasten the clips that hold thecover on and remove the cover.

2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter.

3. Inspect or replace the air filter.See Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11‑9 to determinewhich filter to use.

4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover. Fasten the clips tohold the cover in place.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause youor others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.


10-20 Vehicle Care

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

2.9 L L4 Engine Shown (3.7 L L5Engine Similar)

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

C. Radiator Pressure Cap

5.3 L V8 Engine

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Radiator Pressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there isa leak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant otherthan DEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner, at 50 000 km(30,000miles) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-21

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑24.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle's coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain water

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

or the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning.The engine could catch fire andyou or others could be burned.Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection upto 129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Notice: If extra inhibitorsand/or additives are used in thevehicle's cooling system, thevehicle could be damaged. Useonly the proper mixture of theengine coolant listed in thismanual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6 for moreinformation.

Never dispose of engine coolantby putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into sewers,into streams or bodies of water.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Have the coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

It is located toward the rear ofthe engine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system is cool beforethis is done.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface. When the engine is cold,the coolant level should be at FULLCOLD, or a little higher. When theengine is warm, the level could beabove the FULL COLD level.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at least up to theFULL COLD mark. If it is not, therecould be a leak in the coolingsystem.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

When the coolant in the coolantrecovery tank is at the FULL COLDmark, start the vehicle.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.


Vehicle Care 10-23

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if youturn the surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

cooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

1. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone full turn.

If a hiss is heard, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there is stillsome pressure left.

2. Keep turning the cap toremove it.

3. Fill the radiator with the properDEX‐COOL coolant mixture,up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑21 for more informationabout the proper coolantmixture.


10-24 Vehicle Care

4. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe FULL COLD mark.

5. Reinstall the cap on the coolantrecovery tank, but leave theradiator pressure cap off.

6. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hose canbe felt getting hot. Watch out forthe engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant levelinside the radiator filler neckmight be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX‐COOL coolant mixturethrough the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of thefiller neck.

8. Then replace the pressure cap.

At any time during this procedureif coolant begins to flow out ofthe filler neck, reinstall thepressure cap.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has a coolanttemperature gauge displayed onthe instrument panel to warn if theengine is overheating. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑10. If the engine is too hot,the air conditioning might stopworking. This is normal and helpscool the engine.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when the warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.


Vehicle Care 10-25

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan is running. If the engineis overheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine and have thevehicle serviced.

The engine cooling fan speedshould increase when idle speed isdoubled by pushing the acceleratorpedal down. If it does not, thevehicle needs service. Turn off theengine.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catchesfire because of being driven withno coolant, your vehicle canbe badly damaged. The costlyrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when yourengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop yourengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer. See “Driving on

Grades” under Trailer Towing onpage 9‑64.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.


10-26 Vehicle Care

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pullover, stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engineuntil it cools down.

Engine FanThis vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan. When the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the clutch is not engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing and/or highoutside temperatures, the fan speedincreases when the clutch engages.So you may hear an increase in fannoise. This is normal and shouldnot be mistaken as the transmissionslipping or making extra shifts.It is merely the cooling systemfunctioning properly. The fan willslow down when additional coolingis not required and the clutchdisengages.

This fan noise may also be heardwhen the engine is started. It will goaway as the fan clutch disengages.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir islocated near the front of the enginecompartment, behind the radiator.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.


Vehicle Care 10-27

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Then remove the cap again andlook at the fluid level on thedipstick.

The level should be between theADD and FULL marks. If necessary,add only enough fluid to bring thelevel up to the proper range.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluidis needed, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature mayfall below freezing, use a fluid thathas sufficient protection againstfreezing.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. Thisallows for fluid expansionif freezing occurs, whichcould damage the tank ifit is completely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has front disc brakesand rear drum brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Rear drum brakes do not havewear indicators, but if a rear brakerubbing noise is heard, have therear brake linings inspectedimmediately. Rear brake drumsshould be removed and inspectedeach time the tires are removed forrotation or changing. Drum brakeshave an inspection hole to inspectlining wear during scheduledmaintenance. When the front brakepads are replaced, have the rearbrakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be asign that brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.


10-30 Vehicle Care

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the liningsare worn, there will be too muchfluid when new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking BrakeFluid” in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

The fluid level should be above thePP mark. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above the PP mark but notover the MAX mark.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.


Vehicle Care 10-31

Notice:. Using the wrong fluidcan badly damage brakehydraulic system parts.For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in thebrake hydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for battery location.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑90 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to checkthe lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2.


10-32 Vehicle Care

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

A. Drain Plug

B. Fill Plug

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant will

need to be added. Remove the plugand add enough lubricant to raisethe level to the bottom of the fill plughole. Use care not to overtightenthe plug.

What to Use

See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

Front Axle

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck the front axle fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected or anunusual noise is heard. A fluid losscould indicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.



If the level is below the bottom ofthe filler plug hole, located on thefront axle, some lubricant may needto be added.

When the differential is cold, addenough lubricant to raise the levelto 12 mm (1/2 in) below the fillplug hole.


Vehicle Care 10-33

When the differential is at operatingtemperature (warm), add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug hole.

What to Use

See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

Rear Axle

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless thereis a leak suspected or an unusualnoise is heard. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.



The proper level is from 0mm to10 mm (0 to 3/8 in) below the bottomof the fill plug hole, located on therear axle.

What to Use

See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6 todetermine which kind of lubricantto use.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑47.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.


10-34 Vehicle Care

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicleshould start only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parkingbrake. See Parking Brake onpage 9‑47.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying the

regular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. For automatic transmission

vehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park).

. For manual transmissionvehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when youpress the key release button.

On all vehicles, the ignitionkey should come out only inLOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shiftto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removedin different ways. For proper typeand length, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑9.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damage thewindshield. Any damage that occurswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not allow the wiperblade arm to touch the windshield.

1. To remove the old wiper blades,lift the wiper arm until it locksinto a vertical position.


10-36 Vehicle Care

A. Blade Assembly

B. Arm Assembly

C. Locking Tab

D. Blade Pivot

E. Hook Slot

F. Arm Hook

2. Press down on the bladeassembly pivot locking tab.Pull down on the bladeassembly to release it fromthe wiper arm hook.

3. Remove the insert from theblade assembly. The insert hastwo notches at one end that arelocked by bottom claws of theblade assembly. At the notchedend, pull the insert from theblade assembly.

4. To install the new wiper insert,slide the insert (D), notched endlast, into the end with two bladeclaws (A). Slide the insert all the

way through the blade claws atthe opposite end (B). The plasticcaps (C) will be forced off as theinsert is fully inserted.

5. Be sure that the notches arelocked by the bottom claws.Make sure that all other clawsare properly locked on bothsides of the insert slots.


Vehicle Care 10-37

A. Claw in Notch

B. Correct Installation

C. Incorrect Installation

6. Put the blade assembly pivot inthe wiper arm hook. Pull up untilthe pivot locking tab locks in thehook slot.

7. Carefully lower the wiper armand blade assembly onto thewindshield.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment tothe low-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatthe vehicle be taken to the dealerfor service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑41.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.


10-38 Vehicle Care

Headlamps

A. Low-Beam Headlamp/DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL)

B. High-Beam Headlamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

2. Reach in and access the bulbsockets from inside the enginecompartment.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assemblyand pull it straight out.

4. Unplug the electrical connectorfrom the old bulb by releasingthe clips on the bulb socket.

5. Pull the old bulb straight out.

6. Push the new bulb straight inuntil it clicks to secure it.

7. Plug in the electrical connectorto the new bulb socket.

8. Push the bulb socket straight inand turn it clockwise to secure itin the headlamp assembly.

Front Turn Signal,Parking, and DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL)To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

2. Reach in to access either one ofthe bulb sockets in the enginecompartment.


Vehicle Care 10-39

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and removeit from the lamp assembly.

4. Holding the socket, pull the oldbulb to release it from the bulbsocket.

5. Push the new bulb into thesocket until it clicks.

6. Push the bulb socket straightinto the lamp assembly and turnit clockwise to secure.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps

A. Stoplamp/Taillamp

B. Turn Signal/Taillamp

C. Back‐up Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgateon page 2‑7.

2. Remove the two rear lampassembly screws near thetailgate latch.

3. Pull the lamp assembly awayfrom the vehicle.


10-40 Vehicle Care

4. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

5. Holding the socket, pull the oldbulb straight out to release itfrom the socket.

6. Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it clicks.

7. Insert the bulb socket into thetaillamp assembly and turn itclockwise to secure.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assemblyand tighten the screws.

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)To replace the CHMSL bulb:

1. Remove the two screws and liftoff the lamp assembly from thevehicle.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and remove itfrom the lamp assembly.

3. Holding the socket, pull the bulbto release it from the socket.

4. Push the new bulb into thesocket until it clicks.

5. Insert the bulb socket into thelamp assembly and turn itclockwise to secure.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly andtighten the screws.


Vehicle Care 10-41

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Reach under the rear bumper forthe bulb socket.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb socket out of the connector.

3. Pull the old bulb straight outfrom the bulb socket.

4. Push the new bulb straight inuntil it clicks to secure it.

5. Reach under the rear bumper toreinstall the bulb socket into theconnector.

6. Turn the bulb socket clockwiseto secure it to the connector.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Cargo Lampand CenterHigh‐MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)

912LL

License Plate Bulb 168LL

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Headlamps

High-beam 9005

Low-beam/DaytimeRunningLamp (DRL)

9006

Parking/Front TurnSignal 3757KA

Parking Lamp(Inboard)

3157A

Stoplamp, RearTurn Signal,Taillamp, andBack‐up Lamp

3057

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chance ofcircuit overload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and Other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Havethe headlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on theroad and do not have a spare fuse,you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick somefeature of the vehicle that you canget along without— like the radioor cigarette lighter— and use itsfuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

The engine compartment fuse blockis located on the driver side of theengine compartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon location.

To remove the cover, push in on thetab on the end of the cover and lift.To reinstall the cover, line up the taband push down on the cover untilthe tab clicks into place.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.


10-44 Vehicle Care

The trailer brake relay is locatedon the bottom side of the batteryharness.

Fuses Usage

O2 SNSR

Oxygen Sensors,Air InjectionReactor (AIR)Relay

A/CAir ConditioningControl Head,Power Seats

Fuses Usage

A/CCMPRSR

Air ConditioningCompressor

ABS

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS),ABS Module,Four‐Wheel Drive,Gravity Sensor

ABS 1 ABS 1 (ABS Logic)

ABS 2 ABS 2 (ABS Pump)

AUX PWR 1 Accessory Power 1

AUX PWR 2 Accessory Power 2

BCK/UP Back-up Lights

BLWRClimateControl Fan

CLSTR Cluster

CNSTRVENT

Fuel CanisterVent Solenoid


Vehicle Care 10-45

Fuses Usage

CRUISE

Cruise ControlSwitch, InsideRearview Mirror,Transfer CaseControl Module,Brake Switch,Clutch Disable

DR/LCKPower DoorLocks (If Equipped)

DRLDaylight RunningLamps

ERLS

Mass AirFlow (MAF)Sensor, CanPurge Solenoid,Air InjectorReactor (AIR)Relay

Fuses Usage

ETC Electronic ThrottleControl (ETC)

FOG/LAMPFog Lamps(If Equipped)

FRTPRK LAMP

Front Park/TurnLamps, Driver andPassenger SidePower WindowSwitches Lighting

FRT/AXLE Front Axle Actuator

FSCMFuel SystemControl Module

BACKUPLAMP

Backup Lamp

HORN Horn

HTD/SEATHeated Seat(If Equipped)

Fuses Usage

IGN

Ignition, ClutchStarter Switch,Neutral SafetyBack‐Up Switch,Ignition Coils 1‐5,Air ConditioningRelay

INJ Injectors

LT HDLPDriver SideHeadlamp

PCMBPower ControlModule (PCM) B

PCMIPower ControlModule (PCM)

PWR/SEATPower SeatCircuit Breaker(If Equipped)


10-46 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

PWR/WNDW Power Windows(If Equipped)

RDO Radio

REARPRK LAMP

Rear ParkingLamp 1, PassengerSide Taillamp,License PlateLamps

REAR PRKLAMP2

Driver SideRear Taillamp,PassengerSide AirbagIndicator Lighting,Instrument PanelDimming Power(2WD/4WD switchlighting)

RT HDLPPassenger SideHeadlamp

Fuses Usage

RVC Regulated VoltageControl

S/ROOF Not Used

STOP Stop Lamps

STRTRStarter SolenoidRelay

TBCTruck BodyController

TCMTransmissionControl Module

TCCMTransfer CaseControl Module

TRAILERBRAKE

Trailer Brake

TRANSTransmissionSolenoid

Fuses Usage

TRN/HAZRD FRT

Turn/Hazard/Courtesy/CargoLamps/Mirrors

TRN/HAZRDREAR

Rear Turn/HazardLights

VSES/STOPVehicle StabilityEnhancementSystem/Stop

WPR Wiper

WSWWiper/WasherSwitch


Vehicle Care 10-47

Relays Usage

A/CCMPRSR

Air ConditioningCompressor

Backup Lamp Backup Lamp

BEAM SEL Beam Selection

DRLDaylightRunning Lamps

FOG/LAMPFog Lamps(If Equipped)

HDLP Headlamps

HORN Horn

IGN 3 HVAC

Ignition 3, ClimateControl, ClimateControl HeadFuse, PowerSeat Fuse

Relays Usage

PRK/LAMPFront ParkingLamp Fuse, RearParking Lamps

PWR/TRN

Powertrain,ElectronicThrottle ControlFuse, OxygenSensor Fuse

RAP

RetainedAccessoryPower (PowerWindow Fuse,Wiper/WasherSwitch Fuse)

Relays Usage

RUN/CRNK

Run/Crank, AirbagSystem Fuse,Cruise ControlFuse, IgnitionFuse, Back-UpLamps, ABS Fuse,Front Axle, PCM-1,Injectors Fuse,TransmissionFuse, ERLS

STRTRStarter Relay(PCM Relay)

VSESVehicle StabilityEnhancementSystem

WPR Wipers (On/Off)

WPR 2 Wiper 2 (High/Low)


10-48 Vehicle Care

Miscellaneous Usage

A/C CLTCHDiode — AirConditioning,Clutch

MEGA FUSE Mega Fuse

WPR Diode — Wiper

2.9L and 3.7L


Vehicle Care 10-49

5.3L

Fuses Usage

A Trailer Park Lamp

BCommunicationInterface Module

C

SupplementalInflatable RestraintSystem, Sensingand DiagnosticModule

DTrailer AuxiliaryMaxi-Fuse


10-50 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresThis new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. If youever have questions about yourtire warranty and where toobtain service, see the vehicleWarranty booklet for details. Foradditional information refer tothe tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Youcould have a blowout and aserious accident. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑22.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Under inflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Over inflated tires aremore likely to be cut,punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such aswhen you hit a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

. Worn or old tires can causea crash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tireis molded into its sidewall. Theexamples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.


Vehicle Care 10-51

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size isa combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,

tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are requiredto grade tires based onthree performance factors:treadwear, traction, andtemperature resistance. Formore information see UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑68.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.


10-52 Vehicle Care

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a treadlife of approximately 5 000 km(3,000 miles) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost airand gone flat. If your vehicle

has a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑88 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑72.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code isthe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to

420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56.

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following illustration showsan example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tire

is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amountof air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thismeans the combined weightof optional accessories.Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows,power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.


10-54 Vehicle Care

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑56.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A codemolded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire isin compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑22.

GAWR FRT: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑22.

GAWR RR: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the rear axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑22.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:A tire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑22.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tirethat contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑56andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑22.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 inch) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑65.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings fora tire's traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire. SeeUniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 10‑68.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑22.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehicle'scapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑22.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that underinflation oroverinflation is all right. It isnot. If the tires do not haveenough air (underinflation),you can get the following:. Tire overloading andover-heating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.


Vehicle Care 10-57

If the tires have too much air(overinflation), you can get thefollowing:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to your vehicle. Thislabel shows your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount ofair pressure needed to supportyour vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑22. Howyou load your vehicle affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Also check the tirepressure of the spare tire.If your vehicle has a compactspare tire, it should be at 60 psi(420 kPa). See Compact SpareTire on page 10‑88 andFull-Size Spare Tire onpage 10‑89 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are underinflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.


10-58 Vehicle Care

If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat build upand can cause sudden tire failure.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

If your vehicle has P235/50R18 sizetires, they will require inflationpressure adjustment whendriving your vehicle at speeds of100 mph (160 km/h) or higher.

Set the cold inflation pressure to themaximum inflation pressure shownon the tire sidewall, or 35 psi(241 kPa), whichever is lower. Seethe example following. When youend this high-speed driving, returnthe tires to the cold tire inflationpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑22and Tire Pressure on page 10‑56.

Example:

You will find the maximum load andinflation pressure molded on thetire's sidewall, in small letters,near the rim flange. It will readsomething like this: Maximum load690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi)Max. Press.

For this example, you would set theinflation pressure for high‐speeddriving at 35 psi (241 kPa).


Vehicle Care 10-59

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may notbe able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑60 foradditional information.


10-60 Vehicle Care

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly on your vehicle, excludingthe spare tire. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in yourvehicle's tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument panelcluster.

If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑22.

At the same time, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) messageis displayed on the DIC displayscreen. The low tire pressurewarning light and the DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the tires are inflated tothe correct inflation pressure.

For additional information anddetails about the DIC operationand displays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑21 and TireMessages on page 5‑28.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressure foryour vehicle's tires when they arecold. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑22, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location on your vehicle.Also see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56.


Vehicle Care 10-61

Your vehicle's TPMS can warn youabout a low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑63, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑63 and Tires onpage 10‑50.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stayson for the remainder of the ignition

cycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The low tire warninglight and DIC warning messagecome on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not havea TPMS sensor. The TPMSmalfunction light and DICmessage should go off once youre‐install the road tire containingthe TPMS sensor.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle's tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction lightshould go off once the TPMSsensor matching process isperformed successfully. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged. TheDIC message and the TPMSmalfunction light should gooff when the TPMS sensorsare installed and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle's originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑65.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer forservice if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.


10-62 Vehicle Care

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any time youreplace one or more of the TPMSsensors or rotate your vehicle'stires, the identification codes needto be matched to the new tire/wheelposition. The sensors are matchedto the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side reartire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire's air pressure. If increasing thetire's air pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire's sidewall. Tolet air-pressure out of a tire you canuse the pointed end of the valvecap, a pencil-style air pressuregauge, or a key.

You have one minute to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall, to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger than one minute, to matchthe first tire and wheel, or more thanfive minutes to match all four tireand wheel positions, the matchingprocess stops and you need tostart over.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocedure is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch toON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Turn the exterior lamp switchfrom AUTO to OFF four timeswithin three seconds. A doublehorn chirp will sound and theTPMS low tire warning lightstarts flashing. The doublehorn chirp and flashing TPMSwarning light indicates the TPMSmatching process has started.

The TPMS warning light shouldcontinue flashing throughout thematching procedure. The LOWTIRE message displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC).

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Remove the valve cap from thevalve cap stem. Activate theTPMS sensor by increasing ordecreasing the tire's air pressurefor 10 seconds, then stop andlisten for a single horn chirp. Thesingle horn chirp should soundwithin 15 seconds, confirmingthat the sensor identificationcode has been matched to thistire and wheel position. If you donot hear the confirming singlehorn chirp, turn the ignitionswitch to LOCK and start overbeginning with Step 2.

6. Proceed to the passengerside front tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.


Vehicle Care 10-63

7. Proceed to the passengerside rear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5.

9. After hearing the confirming hornchirp for the driver side rear tire,check to see if the TPMS low tirewarning light and the DIC LOWTIRE messages have turned off.If yes, the TPMS sensors havebeen relearned. Turn the ignitionswitch to LOCK/OFF.

If the low tire warning light andthe SERV TPM message on theDIC are on after completingStep 5 for the driver side reartire, the sensor relearn processhas not been successful. Turnthe ignition switch to LOCK/OFFand repeat the matching processbeginning with Step 2.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect the vehicle'stires, including the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, for signsof wear or damage at least oncea month.

Always remove the tires if anyof the following statementsare true:. You can see the indicators at

three or more places aroundthe tire.

. You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cordor fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 miles). SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑65 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑70.

When rotating the vehicle's tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

The compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one, is not includedin the tire rotation.

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and rearinflation pressures as shown onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑22.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑60.

Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑72.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.


Vehicle Care 10-65

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures, drivingspeeds, vehicle loading, and roadconditions influence when you neednew tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) orless of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may nothave treadwear indicators.

See Tire Inspection on page 10‑63and Tire Rotation on page 10‑63 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This is also true for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnot being used. Multiple conditionsaffect how fast this aging takesplace, including temperatures,loading conditions, and inflationpressure maintenance. Tires willtypically need to be replaced due towear before they may need to bereplaced due to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tiresor raise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for your vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedon your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC spec) systemrating. If you need replacementtires, GM strongly recommends thatyou get tires with the same TPCSpec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires thatare designed to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the originaltires.


10-66 Vehicle Care

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of yourvehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM's TPCSpec number is molded onto thetire's sidewall near the tire size.If the tires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC spec number willbe followed by an MS for mud andsnow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 10‑50 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing tires insets of four. This is because uniformtread depth on all tires will helpkeep your vehicle performing mostlike it did when the tires were new.Replacing less than a full set of tirescan affect the braking and handlingperformance of your vehicle. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑63 andTire Rotation on page 10‑63 forinformation on proper tire rotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. You or otherscould be injured or killed if youattempt to mount or dismounta tire. Only your dealer or anauthorized tire service centershould mount and dismount thetires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause you tolose control of your vehicle whiledriving. If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires) the vehiclemay not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or typesmay also cause damage to your

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and type oftires on all wheels.

Your vehicle may have a compactspare tire and wheel assembly.It is all right to drive with yourvehicle's compact spare tiretemporarily. It was developedfor use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑88.

{ WARNING

If you use bias-ply tires on thevehicle, the wheel rim flangescould develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-67

If you must replace your vehicle'stires with those that do not have aTPC Spec number, make sure theyare the same size, load range,speed rating, and construction type(radial and bias‐belted tires) as yourvehicle's original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low‐pressure warningif non‐TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled on your vehicle. Non‐TPCSpec rated tires may give alow‐pressure warning that is higheror lower than the proper warninglevel you would get with TPC Specrated tires. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 10‑59.

Your vehicle's original equipmenttires are listed on the Tire andLoading Information Label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑22,for more information about the Tireand Loading Information Label andits location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that area different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way the vehicleperforms, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{ WARNING

If you add different sizedwheels, the vehicle may notprovide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑65 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not apply

to deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions ona specified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


Vehicle Care 10-69

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire

is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels on the vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if thereis unusual tire wear or the vehiclepulls to one side or the other, thealignment should be checked. If thevehicle vibrates when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. Seeyour dealer for proper diagnosis.


10-70 Vehicle Care

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it,except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired.See your dealer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel you need.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors forthe vehicle.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on the vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of thevehicle, make the tires lose airand make you lose control. Youcould have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim,bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body andchassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑72 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been used orhow far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and causea crash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

If your vehicle has P215/70R16,P235/75R16, P265/70R17,P235/50R18, or P265/65R18 sizetires, do not use tire chains.They can damage your vehiclebecause there is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on avehicle without the proper amountof clearance can cause damageto the brakes, suspension,or other vehicle parts. The areadamaged by the tire chains couldcause you to lose control of yourvehicle and you or others may beinjured in a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on yourvehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions.To help avoid damage to yourvehicle, drive slowly, readjust,or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle. Do notspin the vehicle's wheels.

If you do find traction devices thatwill fit, install them on the reartires.

Notice: If your vehicle has a tiresize other than P215/70R16,P235/75R16, P265/70R17,P235/50R18, or P265/65R18 usetire chains only where legal andonly when you must. Use chainsthat are the proper size for yourtires. Install them on the tires ofthe rear axle. Do not use chainson the tires of the front axle.Tighten them as tightly aspossible with the ends securelyfastened. Drive slowly andfollow the chain manufacturer'sinstructions. If you can hear thechains contacting your vehicle,stop and retighten them. If thecontact continues, slow downuntil it stops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chainson will damage your vehicle.


10-72 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from the

accelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but youcan still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road, if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may causea blowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next partshows how to use the jackingequipment to change a flat tiresafely.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.


Vehicle Care 10-73

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle canslip off the jack and roll over orfall on you or other people. Youand they could be badly injured oreven killed. Find a level place tochange your tire. To help preventthe vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

3. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle,be sure the transfer caseis in a drive gear – not inN (Neutral).

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

To be even more certain thevehicle will not move, put blocksat the front and rear of the tirefarthest away from the one beingchanged. That would be the tireon the other side, at the oppositeend of the vehicle.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

A. Wing Nut

B. Storage Bag and Tools

The tools you will need are locatedunder the right front passenger seat.

1. Move the seat all theway forward to locate thetool bag.

2. Locate the wing nut (A) usedto retain the storage bag andtools (B). Turn itcounterclockwise to releasethe bag.

Put the tools to the side while youaccess the jack and wheel blocks.

Regular/Extended Cab

For regular and extended cabvehicles, the jack and wheel blocksare located under the cover at thecenter of the vehicle behind thefront seats.

1. Turn the wing nut on the covercounterclockwise to remove it.


Vehicle Care 10-75

A. Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Wing Nut

D. Jack Knob

2. Lower the jack (A) by turning thejack knob (D) counterclockwiseto release the jack from thebracket.

3. Turn the wing nut (C) holding thewheel blocks (B) to the back ofthe vehicle counterclockwise torelease the wheel blocks.

Crew Cab

For crew cab models, the jack andwheel blocks are located under thedriver side rear seat.

1. Reach under the rear seat toaccess the jack and wheelblocks.

2. Turn the jack knobcounterclockwise to lower thejack all the way and release itfrom the bracket.

3. Remove the wheel blocks andthe wheel block retainer byturning the wing nutcounterclockwise.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Use the jack handle extensions andthe wheel wrench to remove theunderbody-mounted spare tire.

A. Jack Handle Extensions

B. Jack

C. Jack Handle

D. Wheel Wrench

E. Wheel Blocks

1. Assemble the wheel wrench (D),the jack handle extensions (A)and the jack handle (C) asshown.

2. Insert the chiseled end of thejack handle (C) at a slightangle through the hole in therear bumper and into thefunnel-shaped guide.

3. Turn the wheel wrench (D)counterclockwise to lowerthe spare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-77

If the spare tire does not lower tothe ground, the secondary latchis engaged causing the tire notto lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 10‑85.

4. Tilt the retainer when the tire hasbeen lowered, and slide it up thecable so it can be pulled upthrough the wheel opening.

5. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

Use the following pictures andinstructions to remove the flat tireand raise the vehicle.

The tools you will be using includethe jack (A), the wheel blocks (B),the extension tool (C), the jackhandle extensions (D), and thewheel wrench (E).

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑72 for moreinformation.

2. Remove the center cap byplacing the chisel end of thewheel wrench (E) into one of theslots on the wheel and gentlyprying the cap out.


10-78 Vehicle Care

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts by turning itcounterclockwise. Do notremove the wheel nuts yet.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when itis jacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack you couldbe badly injured or killed. Neverget under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

Front Position

4. Position the jack (A) under thevehicle as shown for the front orrear locations.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Front Position

If the flat tire is on the front ofthe vehicle, position the jack tothe rear of the front tire in thepocket off of the frame.

Rear Position

If the flat tire is on the rear,position the jack under therear axle and get as close aspossible to the shock absorber.

5. Make sure the jack head ispositioned so that the rear axleis resting securely betweenthe grooves that are on thejack head.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the vehicle.Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the spare tire to fitunder the wheel well.

7. Remove all the wheel nuts andthe flat tire.


10-80 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑72.

8. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

9. Install the spare tire.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Put the wheel nuts back onwith the rounded end of thenuts toward the wheel. Tighteneach wheel nut by hand.Then use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts until the wheelis held against the hub.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Front Position

Rear Position

11. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lowerthe vehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

12. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlyin a crisscross sequence asshown by turning the wheelwrench clockwise.


10-82 Vehicle Care

When you reinstall the regularwheel and tire, you must alsoreinstall the center cap. Place thecap on the wheel and tap it intoplace until it seats flush with thewheel. The cap only goes onone way. Be sure to line up thetab on the center cap with theindentation on the wheel.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminumwheel with a flat tire under yourvehicle for an extended periodof time or with the valve stempointing up can damage the

wheel. Always stow the wheelwith the valve stem pointingdown and have the wheel/tirerepaired as soon as possible.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.

1. Put the tire on the ground at therear of the vehicle with the valvestem pointed down.

2. Tilt the retainer downwardand through the center wheelopening. Make sure the retaineris fully seated across theunderside of the wheel.

3. Assemble the wheel wrench, thejack handle extensions, and thejack handle as shown.


Vehicle Care 10-83

4. Insert the chiseled end ofthe jack handle at a slightangle through the hole in therear bumper and into thefunnel-shaped guide.

5. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the tirepart way up. Make sure theretainer is seated in the wheelopening and the valve stem ispointed down.

Continue raising the tire, watchto make sure it does not getcaught on anything on theunderbody. If the tire does getcaught, loosen two or three turnsand push and pull the tire andthen retighten.

Repeat this procedure as manytimes as needed to ensureproper stowage.

6. When the tire is properlyseated to the underbody,continue turning the wheelwrench clockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten thecable.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), andthen try to turn (B) the tire.If the tire moves, check tomake sure the tire valve stem ispointing down, then use thewheel wrench to loosen andthen tighten the cable.

To store the tools:

1. Return the tools to thestorage bag.

2. Attach the storage bag tothe floor under the frontpassenger seat.


10-84 Vehicle Care

3. Reinstall the wing nut tosecure the bag to thevehicle.

To store the jack and wheel blocks:

Regular/Extended Cab

A. Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Wing Nut

1. Install the wheel blocks (B) first.

2. Reinstall the wing nut (C) byturning it clockwise to secure thewheel blocks to the vehicle.

3. Lower the jack (A) all the wayand insert the jack into thebracket.

4. Raise the jack by turning thehandle clockwise to secure thejack within the bracket.

5. Put the cover in position andinsert and tighten the wing nut tosecure it.

Crew Cab

A. Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Wing Nut

1. Attach the wheel blocks (B) tothe jack (A) with the wheel blockretainer and the wing nut (C).

2. Reinstall the jack and wheelblock assembly in the mountingbracket. Be sure to position theholes in the base of the jackonto the pins in the mountingbracket.


Vehicle Care 10-85

3. Turn the handle to raise thejack until it is secure, but donot overtighten the jack in thebracket.

Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has anunderbody‐mounted tire hoistassembly that has a secondarylatch system. It is designed to stopthe spare tire from suddenly fallingoff your vehicle. For the secondarylatch to work, the spare must beinstalled with the valve stempointing down. See “Storing aFlat or Spare Tire and Tools” underTire Changing on page 10‑74.

{ WARNING

Before beginning this procedureread all the instructions. Failure toread and follow the instructionscould damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could gethurt. Read and follow theinstructions listed next.

To release the spare tire from thesecondary latch:

1. Check under the vehicle to see ifthe cable end fitting is visible.

2. If the cable end fitting is notvisible, proceed to Step 6.

If it is visible, first try to tightenthe cable by turning the wheelwrench clockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten thecable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning thewheel wrench counterclockwisethree or four turns.

4. Repeat this procedure at leasttwo times. If the spare tirelowers to the ground, continuewith Step 5 under “Storing a Flator Spare Tire and Tools” underTire Changing on page 10‑74.

5. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches(15 cm) of cable is exposed.

6. Stand the wheel blocks on theirshortest ends, with the backsfacing each other.


10-86 Vehicle Care

7. Place the bottom edge of thejack (A) on the wheel blocks (B),separating them so that the jackis balanced securely.

8. Attach the jack handle,extension, and wheel wrench tothe jack and place it (with thewheel blocks) under the vehicletowards the front of the rearbumper. Position the center liftpoint of the jack under thewheel.

9. Turn the wheel wrenchclockwise to raise the jack until itlifts the tire.

10. Continue raising the jack untilthe tire stops moving upwardand is held firmly in place.

11. Remove the jack handle andinsert the hoist end of theextension through the hole inthe rear bumper.

Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise one turnor until the wheel retainerassembly is disengaged.

12. Reinsert the jack handle intothe jack. Lower the jack byturning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keeplowering the jack until thespare tire slides off the jackor is hanging by the cable.


Vehicle Care 10-87

{ WARNING

Someone standing too closeduring the procedure could beinjured by the jack. If the sparetire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one isbehind you or on either side ofyou as you pull the jack out fromunder the spare.

13. Disconnect the jack handlefrom the jack and carefullyremove the jack. Use one handto push against the spare whilefirmly pulling the jack out fromunder the spare tire with theother hand.

If the spare tire is hangingfrom the cable, insert the hoistend of the extension into thehoist shaft hole in the bumperand turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare the rest of the way.

14. Tilt the tire retainer at the endof the cable and pull it throughthe wheel opening. Pull the tireout from under the vehicle.

15. If the cable is hanging underthe vehicle, turn the wheelwrench clockwise to raise thecable.

Have the hoist assemblyinspected as soon as you can.You will not be able to store aspare or flat tire using the hoistassembly until it has beenreplaced.

To continue changing the flat tire,see “Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” under TireChanging on page 10‑74.


10-88 Vehicle Care

Compact Spare TireYour vehicle may have a compactspare tire. Although the compactspare tire was fully inflated whenyour vehicle was new, it can loseair over time. Check the inflationpressure regularly. It should be60 psi (420 kPa).

Notice: If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the compactspare tire is installed on thevehicle, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until you can have the flattire repaired and/or replaced. Youcould damage the vehicle, andthe repair costs would not becovered by your warranty. Neveruse four-wheel drive when thecompact spare tire is installed onthe vehicle.

After installing the compact spareon your vehicle, you should stop assoon as possible and make sureyour vehicle's spare tire is correctlyinflated. The compact spare is madeto perform well at speeds up to62 mph (100 km/h) for distances upto 500 miles (804 km). For heavypayloads or towing, and for lowtraction or four-wheel-driveconditions, repair or replace thefull-size tire. Of course, it is best toreplace your vehicle's spare with afull-size tire as soon as you can.The spare tire will last longer and bein good shape in case you need itagain.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use your compact spare onother vehicles.

And do not mix your compact sparetire or wheel with other wheels ortires. They will not fit. Keep yourspare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.


Vehicle Care 10-89

Full-Size Spare TireYour vehicle may have a full-sizespare tire, which, when new, wasfully inflated. A spare tire may loseair over time, so check its inflationpressure regularly. See TirePressure on page 10‑56 andVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑22for information regarding proper tireinflation and loading your vehicle.For instruction on how to remove,install, or store a spare tire, see“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” and“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools” under Tire Changing onpage 10‑74.

Your vehicle may have a differentsize spare tire than the road tiresoriginally installed on your vehicle.This spare was developed for useon your vehicle, so it is alright todrive on it. If your vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the differentsize spare tire is installed, keep thevehicle in two-wheel drive.

Notice: If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and the differentsize spare tire is installed on thevehicle, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until you can have your flattire repaired and/or replaced. Youcould damage the vehicle, andthe repair costs would not becovered by your warranty. Neveruse four-wheel drive when thedifferent size spare tire isinstalled on the vehicle.

After installing the spare tire on yourvehicle, you should stop as soon aspossible and make sure the spare iscorrectly inflated. The spare tire ismade to perform well at speeds upto 62 mph (100 km/h) for distancesup to 500 miles (804 km). Forheavy payloads or towing, and forlow traction or four-wheel-driveconditions, repair or replace thefull-size tire. Have the damaged orflat road tire repaired or replaced assoon as you can and installed backonto your vehicle. This way, thespare tire will be available in caseyou need it again.

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they willnot fit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together.


10-90 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑31.

If the vehicle battery has run down,you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12‐volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If theyare, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want.

You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutralbefore setting the parking brake.If you have a four-wheel-drivevehicle, be sure the transfercase is not in Neutral.

Notice: If the radio or otheraccessories are left on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-91

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off theradio and all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on the othervehicle. Your vehicle has aremote positive (+) and aremote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon the terminal locations.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the batteries haveenough water. You do not needto add water to the ACDelco®

battery (or batteries) installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.


10-92 Vehicle Care

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other endtouch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part,or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least 45 cm(18 inches) away from the deadbattery, but not near engineparts that move. The electrical

connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks gettingback to the battery is much less.

Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) terminal for thispurpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle thathad the dead battery. If it willnot start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each otheror other metal.


Vehicle Care 10-93

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should betowed with all four wheels offthe ground. Care must be takenwith vehicles that have lowground clearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.


10-94 Vehicle Care

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle? Besure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Notice: If the vehicle istowed with all four wheelson the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not tow the vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground.


Vehicle Care 10-95

Two-wheel-drive vehicles shouldnot be towed with all four wheelson the ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure todinghy tow a four-wheel-drivevehicle:

1. Position the vehicle beingtowed behind the towvehicle.

2. Put an automatic transmissionin P (Park) or a manualtransmission in 1 (First).

3. Turn the engine off and firmly setthe parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑47.

4. Securely attach the vehiclebeing towed to the tow vehicle.

{ WARNING

Shifting a full‐timefour‐wheel‐drive vehicle'stransfer case into N (Neutral)can cause the vehicle to rolleven if the automatic transmissionis in P (Park) or the manualtransmission is in any gear. Youor others could be injured. Makesure the parking brake is firmlyset before the transfer case isshifted to N (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case toN (Neutral). See “Shifting intoN (Neutral)” under Four-WheelDrive on page 10‑31.

6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFFand remove the key— the frontwheels will still turn.

7. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.

After towing see “Shifting Out ofN (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 10‑31.

If the vehicle being towed will not bestarted or driven for six weeks ormore, remove the battery cable fromthe negative terminal (post) of thebattery to prevent the battery fromdraining.


10-96 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing

Front Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground) – Two‐Wheel‐DriveVehicles

Notice: If a two-wheel-drivevehicle is towed with the rearwheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Nevertow the vehicle with the rearwheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles shouldnot be towed with the rear wheelson the ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drivevehicle, the vehicle must be towedwith the rear wheels on the dolly.See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)” later in this section formore information.

Front Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground) – Four-Wheel-DriveVehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow a four-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe front:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the front wheels onto thedolly.


Vehicle Care 10-97


4. Turn the engine off and firmly setthe parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 9‑47.

{ WARNING


5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.


7. Release the parking brake onlyafter the vehicle being towed isfirmly attached to the towingvehicle.


After towing, see “Shifting Out ofN (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 10‑31.

If the vehicle being towed will not bestarted or driven for six weeks ormore, remove the battery cable fromthe negative terminal (post) of thebattery to prevent the battery fromdraining.

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground) – Two‐Wheel‐DriveVehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow a two-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe rear:


2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.


10-98 Vehicle Care

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑47.



6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.


If the vehicle being towed willnot be started or driven forsix weeks or more, remove thebattery cable from the negativeterminal (post) of the battery toprevent the battery fromdraining.

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround) – Four‐Wheel‐DriveVehicles

Use the following procedure to dollytow a four-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe rear:


2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑47.



6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.

{ WARNING



Vehicle Care 10-99



If the vehicle being towed willnot be started or driven forsix weeks or more, remove thebattery cable from the negativeterminal (post) of the battery toprevent the battery fromdraining.

After towing, see “Shifting Out ofN (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Driveon page 10‑31.

Appearance Care

Exterior CareSilicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may berequired. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑6.

Washing the Vehicle

The best way to preserve thevehicle's finish is to keep it cleanby washing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in directsunlight. Use a car washing soap.Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that containacid or abrasives, as they candamage the paint, metal or plasticon the vehicle. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturers'directions regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.


10-100 Vehicle Care

High pressure car washes maycause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 inches) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8 274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle”.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mildpolishing of the vehicle by handmay be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always use

waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help

keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Washing with water is all thatis usually needed. However, chromepolish may be used on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam or caustic soap toclean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lintfree cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshield


Vehicle Care 10-101

thoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sapand a buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels and Trim

The vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using asoft clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a softclean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damagedif the vehicle is not washedafter driving on roads that havebeen sprayed with magnesium,calcium or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such asice and dust. Always wash thevehicle's chrome with soap andwater after exposure.

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brushes

on them because they coulddamage the surface. Do not usechrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.


10-102 Vehicle Care

Tires

To clean the tires, use a stiff brushwith tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's body andpaint shop.

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.

Dirt packed in close areas of theframe should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing systemcan do this.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas of theframe should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing system cando this.


Vehicle Care 10-103

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Although no defect in the paint jobcauses this, we will repair, at nocharge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by thisfallout condition within 12 monthsor 20 000 km (12,000miles) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

Interior CareThe vehicles interior will continueto look its best if it is cleaned often.Dust and dirt can accumulate on theupholstery and cause damage tothe carpet, fabric, leather, andplastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that cantransfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to thevehicles interior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer has products forcleaning the vehicles interior. Whencleaning the vehicles interior, onlyuse cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces that are beingcleaned. Permanent damage canresult from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Apply the cleaner directlyto the cleaning cloth to preventover-spray. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in thevehicles interior. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicles interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicles doors andwindows.

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to the vehiclesinterior surfaces.


10-104 Vehicle Care

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.Avoid laundry detergentsor dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attractsdirt. For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Cleaners that contain solventscan damage the vehiclesinterior.

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith a beater bar in the nozzle mayonly be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first withplain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plainwater.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.


Vehicle Care 10-105

Leather/Leatherette

Leather, and lighter colored leatherin particular, will need more frequentcleaning to prevent the buildup ofdust, dirt, and colors transferredfrom other items so that these donot become permanent stains.

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Your dealer has a GMapproved leather cleaner availablethat provides superior cleaningperformance when used regularlyon finished automotive leathers.Allow the leather to dry naturally. Donot use heat, steam, spot lifters orspot removers, or shoe polish onleather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that aresold to preserve and protect leathermay permanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solvents

to clean the vehicles interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing thegloss in a non-uniform manner.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl andother Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can beused. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect soft plastic surfacesmay permanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Donot use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containingorganic solvents to clean thevehicles interior because they canalter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


10-106 Vehicle Care

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-10

General InformationNotice: Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary to keepthis vehicle in good workingcondition. Damage caused byfailure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section. Werecommend having your dealerperform these services. Propervehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑22.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

. Are driven off-road in therecommended manner. SeeOff-Road Driving on page 9‑7.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑55.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

At your dealer, you can becertain that you will receive thehighest level of service available.Your dealer has specially trainedservice technicians, uses genuinereplacement parts, as well as,up‐to‐date tools and equipmentto ensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑9. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performed.Tires should be rotated every12 000 km/7,500 miles. See TireRotation on page 10‑63.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Oil MessageDisplays

Change engine oil and filter.See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.An Emission Control Service.

When the CHANGE OIL messagedisplays, service is required forthe vehicle as soon as possible,within the next 1 000 km/600 miles.If driving under the best conditions,the engine oil life system mightnot indicate the need for vehicleservice for more than a year.The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year andthe oil life system must be reset.Your dealer has trained servicetechnicians who will performthis work and reset the system.



If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 miles sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑14.

Every Engine Oil Change. Change engine oil and filter.

Reset oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑10 andEngine Oil Life System onpage 10‑14. An EmissionControl Service.

. Engine coolant level check. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑21.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspectionof hoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑27.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑99. Wornor damaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑35.

. Tire inflation pressurescheck. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑56.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑63.

. Rotate tires if necessary. SeeTire Rotation on page 10‑63.

. Fluids visual leak check(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired andthe fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑19.

. Brake system inspection(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspectionfor damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Body hinges and latches, keylock cylinders, and folding seathardware lubrication. Lubricatehood safety lever pivot and proprod pivot and tailgate latch bolt,handle assembly pivot points,and hinges. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑6. More frequentlubrication may be requiredwhen the vehicle is exposedto a corrosive environment.Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean clothmakes them last longer, sealbetter, and not stick or squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑26.



. Fuel system inspection fordamage or leaks.

. Exhaust system and nearbyheat shields inspection for looseor damaged components.

Additional Required Services

Every 12 000 km/7,500Miles. Rotate tires. Tires should

be rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑63.

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑10.. Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 10‑21.. Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑27.

Once a Month. Tire inflation check. See Tire

Pressure on page 10‑56.. Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 10‑63 andTire Rotation on page 10‑63.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑33.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑34.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑34.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑35.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Underbody flushing service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑19.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service) forvehicles mainly driven inheavy city traffic in hot weather,in hilly or mountainous terrain,when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. SeeAutomatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑15.

. Four‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (severeservice) for vehicles mainlydriven when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. Checkvent hose at transfer case forkinks and proper installation.



Check to be sure vent hose isunobstructed, clear, and free ofdebris. During any maintenance,if a power washer is used toclean mud and dirt from theunderbody, care should be takento not directly spray the transfercase output seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.

. Evaporative control systeminspection. Check all fuel andvapor lines and hoses for properhook‐up, routing, and condition.Check that the purge valve,if the vehicle has one, worksproperly. Replace as needed.An Emission Control Service.The U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Boardhas determined that the failureto perform this maintenance item

will not nullify the emissionwarranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of thevehicle's useful life. We,however, urge that allrecommended maintenanceservices be performed at theindicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service). SeeAutomatic Transmission Fluid onpage 10‑15.

. Four‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (normalservice). Check vent hose attransfer case for kinks andproper installation. Check to besure vent hose is unobstructed,clear, and free of debris. Duringany maintenance, if a powerwasher is used to clean mudand dirt from the underbody,care should be taken to not

directly spray the transfer caseoutput seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wires inspection.An Emission Control Service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill (or everyfive years, whicheveroccurs first). See EngineCoolant on page 10‑21. AnEmission Control Service.

. Engine drive belts inspectionfor fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage(or every 10 years, whicheveroccurs first). Replace, if needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification. Oilsmeeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™ certificationmark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos™certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑21.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, inCanada 89021320).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking Brake Cable GuidesChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 89021806, in Canada 89021807).




Hydraulic Clutch System Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part No. 12345347, in Canada 10953517) orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Front and Rear AxleSAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Transfer CaseSynchromesh Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 12345349, inCanada 10953465).

Rear Driveline Center Spline andUniversal Joints

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Constant Velocity Universal JointChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.




Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges, Body DoorHinge Pins, Liftgate Hinge and

Linkage, Folding Seats, and FuelDoor Hinge

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Pointsand Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15942429 —

Engine Oil Filter

2.9L L4 Engine 19210283 PF46

3.7L L5 Engine 19210285 PF61

5.3L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs

2.9L L4 and 3.7L L5 Engines 12625058 41-103

5.3L V8 Engine 12609877 41-985

Wiper Blades

Driver Side — 55 cm (22 in) 10389562 —

Passenger Side — 48 cm (19 in) 10389563 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicleengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Model designation. Paint information. Production options and special

equipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate conversion capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑6 for more information.

Capacities and Specifications

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

2.9L L4 Engine 9.8 L 10.4 qt

3.7L L5 Engine 10.0 L 10.6 qt

5.3L V8 Engine 13.0 L 13.7 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.9L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt

3.7L L5 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

5.3L V8 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt


Technical Data 12-3

Capacities and Specifications (cont'd)

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Fuel Tank 74 L 19.5 gal

Transmission

Automatic (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement) 4.7 L 5.0 qt

Manual – Rear-Wheel Drive (Drain and Refill) 2.2 L 2.3 qt

Manual – Four-Wheel Drive (Drain and Refill) 2.3 L 2.4 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Type VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.9L L4 9AutomaticManual

1.01 mm (0.040 in)

3.7L L5 E Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)

5.3L V8 P Automatic 1.01 mm (0.040 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.9L and 3.7L Engines

5.3L Engine


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users (U.S.and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-12

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-15

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-17OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782, CustomerAssistance prompt. In Canada,call General Motors of CanadaCustomer Communication at1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). This is available from thevehicle registration or title, orthe plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility.That is why we suggest followingStep One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two,you can file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofilling out a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be awareof its participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685,or call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with your newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.



Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage ofyour vehicle must be handledby your dealer sales or servicedepartments. However, werecognize that despite the goodintentions of all parties involved,sometimes a misunderstandingmay occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to the dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. Theyare interested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or thedealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number

. Model year

. Brand

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Mileage

. Delivery date

. Description of the problem

. Dealership name

. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for moreinformation.



Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)GMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1‐800‐GMC‐8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-800-462-8583 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-462-8782

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S.de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0801Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0801

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].



Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0812

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0812

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8191

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with GMC by dialing:1-800-462-8583. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

GMC Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmcownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more. Store online service and

maintenance records. GMC dealer locator for service

nationwide. Exclusive privileges and offers. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries



Other Helpful Links

GMC — www.gmc.com

GMC Merchandise —www.gmccollection.com

Help Center — www.gmc.com/helpcenter. FAQ (Frequently Asked

Questions). Contact Us

My GM Canada — www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quicklinks to parts and serviceestimates, check trade-invalues, or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for your vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.



General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada)For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐800‐462‐8782; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 miles),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlockmay be available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before thisservice is given.



. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was ina crash and cannot be driven.Assistance is also given whenthe vehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America whenrequested either with themost direct route or the mostscenic route. Additional travelinformation is also available.Allow three weeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed duringthe 5 years/(160 000 km)100,000 miles Powertrainwarranty period. Itemsconsidered are hotel, meals,and rental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Limit ofsix requests per year.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometres from whereyour trip was started toqualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.



. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor maygive permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the originalreceipt to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

For detailed information aboutRoadside Assistance, pleasesee the brochure provided withyour new vehicle or visit ourwebsite at: www.gmc.com.mx.Navigate the site and click on“Asistencia en el Camino.” E-mailcorrespondence should be sent to:[email protected].

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0801

United States

1-866-466-8902

Canada

1-800-268-6800

Scheduling ServiceAppointments(U.S. and Canada)When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact the dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, thedealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please call thedealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper to Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing your inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, the dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of the dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead of thedealer's shuttle service, the expensemust be supported by originalreceipts and can only be up to themaximum amount allowed by GMfor shuttle service. In addition, forU.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend orrelative, limited reimbursement forreasonable fuel expenses may beavailable. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.See the dealer for informationregarding the allowance amountsfor reimbursement of fuel or othertransportation costs.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

The dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact thedealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the rightto unilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time andto resolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.



Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choiceto maintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.

As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. The dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring The Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage.There are significant differencesin the quality of coverage affordedby various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.



If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑33.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be coveredby the GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you maybe obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.



If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have thediagnosis and repair informationon the engines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.

Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of Canada Limited.Call them at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, please notify GeneralMotors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.



This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash‐like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit, atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.



Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link withany other GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to anyof these systems by other thanan authorized service facility couldvoid authorization to use thisequipment.



2 NOTES


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-40

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-19Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-33

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-30

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaSatellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Audio SystemChime Level Adjustment . . . . . . . 5-7Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-14Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-37Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-35Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-17


i-2 INDEX

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-28Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . 10-40

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Front Turn Signal,Parking, Sidemarker,and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 10-37, 10-38License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-41Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-55Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71ChargingSystem Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-34

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-50

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-60, 3-62, 3-63Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-103

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-12Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-88Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3


INDEX i-3

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-15

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-12Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-17Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-18If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-21Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Driving (cont.)Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-17

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43


Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Cooling System Messages . . .5-26Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4


i-4 INDEX

Engine (cont.)Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-36Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30

Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-17Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

FilterEngine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-106FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-15Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-31, 9-42Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and DaytimeRunning Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . 10-38

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-55Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-55Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55Requirements, California . . . . .9-55System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-89FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43



INDEX i-5

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-20High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-58Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-18

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90


i-6 INDEX

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-50Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exterior Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-14

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-60

Latch, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6LightingExit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-17Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . 9-51

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-14Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15


INDEX i-7

MessagesBattery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-26Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-27Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

NNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-42Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-35

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-35Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-34Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-33


i-8 INDEX

Power (cont.)Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . .13-11

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51

Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 3-10Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-10

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-94

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2, 2-3

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-41Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-16General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Ride Control SystemsLimited Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-51Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27


INDEX i-9

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-27Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-25

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-16General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9, 3-10Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-85Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . 3-60, 3-62, 3-63

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-10Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-39

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34


i-10 INDEX

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-33Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-DeterrentSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10, 2-12Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Tires (cont.)If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-60Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-59Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Secondary Latch System . . . 10-85Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-70When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65


INDEX i-11

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-59Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-59Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-94Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-48Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Limited-Slip Rear Axle . . . . . . . .9-51Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Vehicle (cont.)Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Vehicle IdentificationService Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27


i-12 INDEX

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-48Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-35

gmc canyon owner manual - 2011 black plate (1,1) 2011 gmc canyon owner manual … · 2020-06-12 ·...

Documents